NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instrument Landing System: Commercial - in - Confidence

Commercial - in - Confidence
NORMARC 7031B-7032B
Instrument Landing System
Instruction Manual
Park Air Systems AS Name Signature Date

PAS Author John Saugstad JSA (sign.) 27-Jun-03
PAS approved by Harald Sandernes HSA (sign.) 27-May-04
NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

23137/Rev.1.3/27-May-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS
.
REVISION STATEMENT
Product Name NORMARC 7031B-7032B
Product Group Instrument Landing System
Manual Type Instruction Manual
Part number: 23137
Part revision: 1.3
Date: 27-May-04
File: 7031B-32B_im_23137-13.pdf
Document part/Chapter Number Rev

Front page and preface, including table of con- *
tents
Chapter 1 General Description I1 1
Chapter 2 Technical Description I2 1
Chapter 3 Operation Instructions I3 2
Chapter 4 Periodic Maintenance I4 2
Chapter 5 Corrective Maintenance I5 3
Chapter 6 Parts Lists I6 2
Chapter 7 Installation and intial Set-up I7 3
Chapter 8 Detailed Technical Description I8 2
Appendix A: Monitor and Maint. parameters IAPA 2
Appendix B: Far Field Monitors IAPB 1
Appendix C: Power Supply IAPC 2
Appendix D: RMM Software IAPD 5
* The revision status for the document front page and preface, including table of contents, is
identical to “Part revision”.
© Copyright 2004 Park Air Systems AS
The information contained herein is the property of Park Air Systems and may not be copied, used or disclosed in whole or in part
except with the prior written permission of Park Air Systems, or if it has been furnished under a contract as expressly authorised
under that contract. The copyright and the foregoing restrictions on copyright use and disclosure extend to all media in which this
information may be preserved including magnetic storage, punched card, paper tape, computer printout, visual display, etc.

23137/Rev.1.3/27-May-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page i
RECORD OF CHANGES
Chg. No. Date Doc.part / Chapter Rev Description Acc.
by.
12-May-03 All 1.0 Technical and Operating books BGR
are now divided into 4 books
4131 15-Dec-03 Ch.5 (Amendment 1) 2 Loop phase optimisation’s BGR
measurements corrected
4131 19-Feb-04 Ch. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 2 Changed block diagrams and BGR
App. A, App. C menu tree from training
and App. D* *5 course, various smaller
improvements, added declara-
tion of conformity (CE)
4158 26-May-04 Ch. 5 and 7 3 Loop phase optimisation’s BGR
(Amendment 2) measurements tables are
removed and TX1 & 2 meas-
urements are corrected.
AMENDMENT INSTRUCTION:
Chapter Description Remove pages Insert pages

Title Page Change date and Rev. Rev. 1.2 Rev. 1.3
Status Change date and Rev. i, ii/Rev. 1.2 i, ii/Rev. 1.3
5.3.10.4 Loop phase optimisa- 5-10/Rev. 2 5-10/Rev. 3
tion.
7.7.7.3 TX1 and 2 7-48/Rev. 2 7-48/Rev. 3
Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

23137/Rev.1.3/27-May-04
Page ii ©2004 Park Air Systems AS

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page iii
- Page intentionally blank -

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page iv ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
REQUESTS OR ERRATA TO PARK AIR SYSTEMS

Send to:
Park Air Systems AS

P.O. Box 50 Manglerud
N - 0612 Oslo Fax | +47 2318 0210
Norway E-mail | oslo@no.parkairsystems.com
Document title | NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual
Company name |
Attention |
Address |
Post Code |
Country |
Request / Error |
Signed |
Date |
Reservation: Park Air Systems AS reserves the right to make

design changes, additions to improvements in its
Products without obligation to install such in Products
previously manufactured.
Limitations of use: The use of this manual is limited to the operation and
maintenance of the system stated in the Title Page. It
shall not be used for purposes of product manufacture.

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page v

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page vi ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................ 1-1

1.1 Purpose and scope..................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Document overview .................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 ILS Description ........................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3.2 ILS Overview .............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3.3 Glide Path Overview................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.4 Glide Path Description................................................................................................ 1-4
1.4 Product Type Numbers............................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................. 1-6
1.5.1 Signal Minimum Performance GP .............................................................................. 1-6
1.5.2 Environmental Characteristics ................................................................................... 1-7
1.5.3 EMC Characteristics .................................................................................................. 1-7
1.5.4 Mechanical Characteristics ....................................................................................... 1-7
1.5.5 Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 1-7
1.6 Physical Organization................................................................................................. 1-8
1.6.1 Module and Assembly Location.................................................................................. 1-8
1.6.2 Service Kit Assembly.................................................................................................. 1-8
1.6.3 Power Supply ............................................................................................................. 1-8
1.7 System Description..................................................................................................... 1-8
1.7.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.7.2 Physical Description ................................................................................................... 1-9
1.7.3 Monitors...................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.7.4 Transmitters / Modulators........................................................................................... 1-10
1.7.5 TX Control .................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.7.6 Remote Monitoring (RMS) Unit .................................................................................. 1-11
1.7.7 Remote Control Unit ................................................................................................... 1-11
1.7.8 Remote Slave Panel................................................................................................... 1-11
1.7.9 Remote Maintenance Monitoring (RMM).................................................................... 1-11
2. SECTION 2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 2-1

2.1 Functional Description ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Transmitter ................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Monitor........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.1.4 Transmitter Control (Station Control).......................................................................... 2-4
2.1.5 Remote control system............................................................................................... 2-6
2.1.6 Remote Monitoring System (RMS)............................................................................. 2-7
2.1.7 General Description.................................................................................................... 2-7
2.1.8 PC and Modem........................................................................................................... 2-8
2.1.9 RMS Data bus ............................................................................................................ 2-8
2.1.10 Maintenance Data Collection...................................................................................... 2-8
2.1.11 Power Supply ............................................................................................................. 2-9
3. SECTION 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .................................................... 3-1

3.1 Main Cabinet .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Power on/off ............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Local Control Operation.............................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Pushbuttons................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.5 Switches/Switchlocks ................................................................................................. 3-4

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page vii
3.1.6 System Status Indications .......................................................................................... 3-5

3.1.7 Local Keyboard/Display Operation ............................................................................. 3-8
3.1.8 The RMS Front Panel................................................................................................. 3-9
3.1.9 The menu structure .................................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.10 Operating the different screens. ................................................................................. 3-10
3.1.11 The access levels. ...................................................................................................... 3-11
3.1.12 Function listing............................................................................................................ 3-12
3.1.13 The menu tree ............................................................................................................ 3-13
3.2 Tower Equipment ....................................................................................................... 3-17
3.2.1 Remote Control Operation.......................................................................................... 3-17
3.2.2 Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.2.3 Pushbuttons................................................................................................................ 3-18
3.2.4 Switches/Switchlocks ................................................................................................. 3-18
3.2.6 Remote Slave Operation ............................................................................................ 3-22
3.2.7 Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.8 Pushbuttons................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.2.10 Interlock Switch Operation.......................................................................................... 3-24
3.3 Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Software ......................................................... 3-24
3.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 3-24
3.3.2 System requirements.................................................................................................. 3-25
3.3.3 User Manual ............................................................................................................... 3-25
3.4 Startup / shutdown procedures................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.1 Startup ........................................................................................................................ 3-25
3.4.2 Shutdown.................................................................................................................... 3-28
4. SECTION 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 4-1

4.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 On-site Performance Checks ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Other On-Site Maintenance........................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3 Off-Site Maintenance.................................................................................................. 4-2
4.2 Periodic Maintenance CAT I, II and III........................................................................ 4-2
4.2.1 Monthly inspections .................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 Six Monthly inspections .............................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.3 Annual inspections ..................................................................................................... 4-4
5. SECTION 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................. 5-1

5.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Diagnostic functions ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 General description .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Current data diagnostics............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.3 Alarm event diagnostics ............................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.4 Manual fault diagnosis................................................................................................ 5-2
5.3 LRU change procedures............................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.1 Replacing units ........................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.2 MF 1211/MF 1219 replacement ................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.3 PS 1227 replacement ................................................................................................. 5-5
5.3.4 OS 1221 replacement................................................................................................. 5-5
5.3.5 MO 1212 replacement ................................................................................................ 5-5
5.3.6 TCA 1218 replacement............................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.7 RMA 1215................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.8 LF 1576 replacement.................................................................................................. 5-8
5.3.9 Coaxial relay............................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.10 LPA 1580/GPA 1581/GPA 1582 replacement............................................................ 5-8
5.3.11 Offset adjustment CSB ............................................................................................... 5-11

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page viii ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
5.3.12 Offset adjustment SBO (n/a for GP CLR transmitter) ................................................. 5-13
5.3.13 Calibrate internal power measurements..................................................................... 5-15
5.4 Detailed description of the automatic diagnostic algorithms....................................... 5-16
5.4.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.2 Possible diagnostic solutions...................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.3 Current data diagnostics............................................................................................. 5-17
5.4.4 Alarm event diagnostics ............................................................................................. 5-21
6. SECTION 6 PARTS LIST .......................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Parts Lists................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Explanation of Parts Lists Form.................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Parts Lists. ......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Usable on code index ................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2 Figures .............................................................................................................. 6-4
7. SECTION 7 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SET-UP ......................................... 7-1

7.1 Mechanical Installation ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Mounting Kit MK 1343A.............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Moving RF Connectors............................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Electrical Installation................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.1 Connection Overview ................................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.2 Power and Battery ...................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.3 RF Inputs .................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.4 RF Outputs ................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.2.5 Loop (Localizer only) .................................................................................................. 7-9
7.2.6 Remote Control .......................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.7 PC and Modem........................................................................................................... 7-11
7.2.8 DME (Does not apply to GP Systems) ....................................................................... 7-11
7.2.9 Analog Inputs.............................................................................................................. 7-12
7.2.10 Digital Inputs and Outputs .......................................................................................... 7-14
7.2.11 Battery Warning.......................................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.12 IIC extension............................................................................................................... 7-17
7.2.13 Remote control connections ....................................................................................... 7-18
7.2.14 Automatic shutdown of GP ......................................................................................... 7-20
7.2.15 Remote slave connection ........................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.16 Interlock switch connection......................................................................................... 7-22
7.2.17 Remote Control Auxiliary Channels............................................................................ 7-23
7.2.18 Remote Control optocoupler outputs.......................................................................... 7-27
7.3 Tests and Adjustments ............................................................................................... 7-28
7.3.1 Configuration Settings ................................................................................................ 7-28
7.3.2 ILS Configuration........................................................................................................ 7-28
7.3.3 Remote Ports Access Level Configuration ................................................................. 7-30
7.3.4 Remote Control Interface (CI 1210) ........................................................................... 7-30
7.3.5 Remote Control configuration..................................................................................... 7-31
7.4 Transmitter Setup ....................................................................................................... 7-32
7.4.1 Transmitter setup........................................................................................................ 7-32
7.4.2 RF output level ........................................................................................................... 7-33
7.4.3 LF Phase Check ......................................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.4 SDM adjustment ......................................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.5 DDM adjustment......................................................................................................... 7-35
7.4.6 CSB / SBO phase adjustment .................................................................................... 7-36
7.4.7 Course Sector adjustment .......................................................................................... 7-38
7.4.8 Ident Morse code........................................................................................................ 7-38
7.4.9 Ident modulation adjustment ...................................................................................... 7-39
7.4.10 Flight Check value setting .......................................................................................... 7-39
7.5 Antenna System Adjustments .................................................................................... 7-40

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page ix
7.6 Monitor Alignment....................................................................................................... 7-40

7.6.1 General....................................................................................................................... 7-40
7.6.2 RF Input Level Adjustment. ........................................................................................ 7-41
7.6.3 AGC Time Adjustment................................................................................................ 7-42
7.6.4 SDM Adjustment......................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6.5 DDM Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 7-42
7.7 Factory Default Configuration Settings....................................................................... 7-42
7.7.1 Cat I monitor LIMIT configuration ............................................................................... 7-42
7.7.2 Description of the FFM EXE AL limits ........................................................................ 7-44
7.7.3 Description of the CL IDENT and CLR IDENT limits .................................................. 7-44
7.7.4 Cat II monitor LIMIT configuration .............................................................................. 7-45
7.7.5 Cat III monitor LIMIT configuration ............................................................................. 7-45
7.7.6 Executive Monitor delay configuration........................................................................ 7-46
7.7.7 Maintenance parameter configuration ........................................................................ 7-46
7.7.8 Maintenance delay configuration................................................................................ 7-50
7.7.9 Morse code configuration ........................................................................................... 7-50
7.8 Typical TX Adjustments values .................................................................................. 7-51
7.9 User administration configuration ............................................................................... 7-51
7.10 Frequency configuration strap settings....................................................................... 7-51
7.10.1 OS 1221B strap settings for 1-frequency GP ............................................................. 7-52
8. SECTION 8 DETAILED TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................... 8-1

8.1 Main Cabinet .............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 MF 1219A GlidePath Monitor Frontend...................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 MO 1212A Monitor ..................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.3 TCA 1218 Transmitter Control Assembly ................................................................... 8-9
8.1.4 LF 1576A Low Frequency Generator ......................................................................... 8-18
8.1.5 OS 1221B RF Oscillator ............................................................................................. 8-21
8.1.6 GPA 1581A GP COU Power Amplifier Assembly ...................................................... 8-23
8.1.7 Change-Over Relays .................................................................................................. 8-30
8.1.8 SC 898C Signal combiner (Hot Standby only) ........................................................... 8-31
8.1.9 PS 1227C Power Supply ............................................................................................ 8-32
8.1.10 RMA 1215A RMS Assembly....................................................................................... 8-33
8.1.11 CI 1210A External Connection Interface .................................................................... 8-36
8.1.12 BW 1566A Battery Warning (Hot Standby only)......................................................... 8-38
8.1.13 MB 1575A Monitor Section Motherboard ................................................................... 8-40
8.2 Tower Equipment ....................................................................................................... 8-41
8.2.1 RCA 1240 Remote Control Assembly ........................................................................ 8-41
8.2.2 MB 1346A Motherboard ............................................................................................. 8-44
8.2.3 PS 635B Power Supply .............................................................................................. 8-45
8.2.4 MB 1347A Motherboard ............................................................................................. 8-45
8.2.5 SF 1344A / SP 1394A Slave Panel ............................................................................ 8-45
8.2.6 IL 1379 / IL 1380 Interlock switch ............................................................................... 8-46
SECTION 11 APPENDIXES ........................................................................................ A-1
APPENDIX A.MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS .......................................... A-1

A.1 Monitor Parameters .................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 Maintenance Parameters ........................................................................................... A-2
APPENDIX B.FAR FIELD MONITOR ............................................................................ B-1
APPENDIX C.POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................. C-1

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page x ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
APPENDIX D.WINDOWS RMM PROGRAM ................................................................. D-1

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page xi

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page xii ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation ..................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1-2 Glide Path block diagram .................................................................. 1-4
Figure 1-3 ILS block diagram. .......................................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-4 The NORMARC 7000B series RMM/RMS systems .................................. 1-12
Figure 2-1 ILS Block Diagram ........................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2 System Block Diagram of a Localizer/Glide Path course Transmitter ....... 2-3
Figure 2-3 Intentionally left blank ..................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-4 TCA 1218A/B Block Diagram ............................................................. 2-5
Figure 2-5 RCA 1240C/D Block Diagram ............................................................ 2-6
Figure 2-6 The RMM configuration ..................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-7 The RMS Databus ............................................................................ 2-8
Figure 2-8 The IIC Serial Bus and ADC Channels ................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-9 Power Supply Functional Diagram ...................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-10 Power Supply Functional Diagram .................................................... 2-11
Figure 3-1 Power ON/OFF and GND Sockets Location........................................... 3-1
Figure 3-2 LC 1217A/B front panel .................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3-3 KD 1214A keyboard/display .............................................................. 3-8
Figure 3-4 Typical top-level LCD screen ............................................................. 3-9
Figure 3-5 The main menu screen ..................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-6 A typical readout screen: CL DDM...................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-7 A typical toggle screen: TX1 90 Hz on/off ........................................... 3-10
Figure 3-8 A typical input/store screen: CL DDM ................................................. 3-11
Figure 3-9 A typical quick read screen: CL.......................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-10 An access denial screen: Switch in REMOTE position ........................... 3-11
Figure 3-11 Level 3 access screen ..................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-12 The top level main menu screen: User in level 3 access....................... 3-12
Figure 3-13 The top levels of the menu tree (part 1)............................................ 3-14
Figure 3-16 RF 1242A/B front panel .................................................................. 3-17
Figure 3-17 SF 1344A front panel...................................................................... 3-22
Figure 4-1 SBO Waveforms ............................................................................. 4-6
Figure 4-2 LF phase check .............................................................................. 4-6
Figure 5-1 Figure 1: Loop Phase Tab ................................................................. 5-10
Figure 5-2 Offset Tab ...................................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-3 Before adjustment .......................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-4 After adjustment ............................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-5 Offset Tab ...................................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-6 Before adjustment .......................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-7 After adjustment ............................................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-8 Power Tab ...................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-9 Flow diagram for Monitor warning tests. ............................................. 5-20
Figure 5-10 Flow diagram for diagnosing a changeover-only alarm. ....................... 5-21
Figure 5-11 Flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown alarms. ................. 5-22
Figure 6-1 NORMARC 7031B-7032B GP cabinet................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-2 NORMARC 7031B-7032B GP cabinet, Rear View ................................... 6-5
Figure 6-3 NORMARC 70xxB LLZ & GP cabinet, wall mount side ............................ 6-6
Figure 7-1 NORMARC 70XXB required mounting space (top view).......................... 7-1
Figure 7-2 NORMARC 70XXB mounted on wall with MK 1343A .............................. 7-2
Figure 7-3 Wall mount dimersions (MK 1343A) ................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-4 Moving RF connectors ...................................................................... 7-4

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page xiii
Figure 7-5 ILS main cabinet connection overview ................................................ 7-5

Figure 7-6 Power and Battery connection Cold Standby........................................ 7-6
Figure 7-7 Power and Battery connection Hot Standby ......................................... 7-7
Figure 7-8 RF input connections........................................................................ 7-8
Figure 7-9 RF output connections...................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-10 DC loop connections ....................................................................... 7-9
Figure 7-11 Remote control connection .............................................................. 7-10
Figure 7-12 PC and modem connections............................................................. 7-11
Figure 7-13 Analog input connections ................................................................ 7-12
Figure 7-14 Typical circuit diagram.................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-15 Digital input/output connections....................................................... 7-14
Figure 7-16 Equivalent circuit diagrams.............................................................. 7-15
Figure 7-17 Battery warning connections............................................................ 7-16
Figure 7-18 IIC extension ................................................................................ 7-17
Figure 7-19 Remote control to ILS connection ..................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-20 Remote control power supply connections ......................................... 7-19
Figure 7-21 Automatic GP shutdown connection .................................................. 7-20
Figure 7-22 Remote slave connection ................................................................ 7-21
Figure 7-23 Interlock switch connection ............................................................. 7-22
Figure 7-24 Connector location, MB 1346 (Remote Control) .................................. 7-24
Figure 7-25 Connector Location, MB 1575 (ILS Rack)........................................... 7-25
Figure 7-26 Typical circuit diagram, Remote Control End ...................................... 7-26
Figure 7-27 Typical circuit diagram, ILS Rack End ............................................... 7-26
Figure 7-28 Typical Remote Control Optocoupler output ....................................... 7-27
Figure 7-29 Transmitter Control strap platforms .................................................. 7-30
Figure 7-30 RF output level ............................................................................. 7-33
Figure 7-31 Maintenance Measurements............................................................. 7-33
Figure 7-32 LF phase CSB illustration................................................................. 7-34
Figure 7-33 SDM Adjustment ............................................................................ 7-34
Figure 7-34 DDM Adjustment............................................................................ 7-35
Figure 7-35 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (Transmitter settings) ............................. 7-36
Figure 7-36 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (flight check) ......................................... 7-37
Figure 7-37 Course Sector Adjustment............................................................... 7-38
Figure 7-38 Flight Check value setting ............................................................... 7-39
Figure 7-39 Adjustment points on Monitor Frontend MF12xx ................................. 7-41
Figure 7-40 Alternative jumper settings of P2++ ................................................. 7-41
Figure 8-1 MF 1219A Block Diagram (CL channel shown) ..................................... 8-4
Figure 8-2 MO 1212A Block Diagram ................................................................. 8-8
Figure 8-3 TCA 1218 Block Diagram .................................................................. 8-17
Figure 8-4 LF 1576A Block Diagram .................................................................. 8-20
Figure 8-5 OS 1221B Block Diagram.................................................................. 8-21
Figure 8-6 GPA 1581A Assembly ...................................................................... 8-27
Figure 8-7 GPA 1581A CSB Block Diagram ......................................................... 8-28
Figure 8-8 GPA 1581A SBO Block Diagram ......................................................... 8-29
Figure 8-9 Change-over system Block Diagram ................................................... 8-30
Figure 8-10 System Diagram standby TX CL/DS simulation................................... 8-31
Figure 8-11 PS 1227 Block Diagram .................................................................. 8-32
Figure 8-12 RMA 1215A Block Diagram .............................................................. 8-33
Figure 8-13 CI 1210A Block Diagram ................................................................. 8-37
Figure 8-14 BW 1566A Block Diagram................................................................ 8-38
Figure 8-15 Block Diagram RCA 1240 ................................................................ 8-41
Figure 8-16 Block Diagram NMP128A ................................................................. 8-43
Figure 8-17 Interlock switch connections ............................................................ 8-46

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page xiv ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4-1 Periodic Maintenance Checks............................................................. 4-1

Table 4-2 Field Modulation check ..................................................................... 4-14
Table 4-3 Not used ........................................................................................ 4-14
Table 4-4 Monitor Integrity Test (Alternative 2) ................................................. 4-14
Table 4-5 Transmitter waveform checks .......................................................... 4-14
Table 4-6 RF Frequency check ........................................................................ 4-14
Table 4-7 LF Frequency check ......................................................................... 4-14
Table 4-8 CSB output power ........................................................................ 4-15
Table 4-9 Monitor Alarm Limits check ............................................................. 4-15
Table 4-10 Near Field Monitor Delay and 20 seconds inhibit ............................... 4-15
Table 4-11 Battery maintenance........................................................................ 4-15
Table 4-12 Not used ........................................................................................ 4-15
Table 7-1 Setting ILS configuration platform U6................................................. 7-28
Table 7-2 Setting RC link shutdown delay ......................................................... 7-29
Table 7-3 Setting RC Main select at changeover................................................. 7-29
Table 7-4 Setting RC indication in Service Mode................................................. 7-29
Table 7-5 Access level strap settings. Warning Configuration ............................... 7-30
Table 7-6 Remote Control Setup ...................................................................... 7-31
Table 7-7 Aural warning configuration ............................................................. 7-31
Table 7-8 Warning reset (Silence) .................................................................. 7-31
Table 7-9 Buzzer ......................................................................................... 7-31
Table 7-10 Telephone Line / RS 232 / TTL logic ................................................... 7-31
Table 7-11 Normal operating power level............................................................ 7-33
Table 7-12 CAT I alarm and warning limits......................................................... 7-43
Table 7-13 Alarm and warning limits for Cat II equipment.................................... 7-45
Table 7-14 Alarm and warning limits for Cat III equipment .................................. 7-45
Table 7-15 Factory default delay values............................................................. 7-46
Table 7-16 Typical TX adjustment values ........................................................... 7-51
Table 7-17 OS 1221B Course frequency settings for 1-freq. GP............................. 7-52
Table 8-1 MB 1575A plug-in module connectors................................................. 8-40
Table A-1 Monitor Alarm/Warning Parameters ................................................... A-1
Table A-2 Maintenance Parameters (Part 1)....................................................... A-2
Table A-3 Maintenance Parameters (Part 2)....................................................... A-3
Table A-4 User Defined Analog Inputs Maintenance Parameters ........................... A-4
Table A-5 User Defined Logical Inputs/Outputs Maintenance Parameters ............... A-4

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page xv

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page xvi ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
AC Alternating Current
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
AGC Automatic Gain Control
CL Course Line
CLR Clearance
COU Course
CPU Central Processing Unit
CS Course Sector
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DC Direct Current
DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation
DF Difference Frequency
DL Dc Loop
DS Displacement Sensitivity
DSP Digital Signal Processor
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Progammable
Read Only Memory
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FIFO First-In-First-Out
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GPA Glidepath Power amplifier Assembly
I/F InterFace
I²C Inter Integrated Circuit
IIC Same as I²C
ILS Instrument Landing System
LED Light Emitting Diode
LF Low Frequency
LLZ Localizer
LPA Localizer Power amplifier Assembly
LRU Line Replacable Unit
MCU Monitor Combiner Unit
NAV NAVigation signals
NF Near Field
PC Personal Computer
RAM Random Access Memory
RF Radio Frequency
RMM Remote Maintenance Monitor
RMS Remote Monitoring System
ROM Read Only Memory

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page xvii
RTC Real Time Clock

SC Station Control
SDM Sum in Depth of Modulation
SPA Same Parameter Alarm
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
STB Standby
SW SoftWare
TRM TeRMinator
TX Transmitter

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page xviii ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
FIRST AID IN CASE OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

The Expire Air method of artificial respiration is recommended for use in any case of
electrical shock. It is comparatively simple and produces the best and quickest
results when correctly applied.
EXPIRE AIR METHOD OF ARTIFICAL RESPIRATION

It is essential to commence artificial respiration without delay.
DO NOT TOUCH THE VICTIM WITH YOUR BARE HANDS until the circuit is broken.
SWITCH OFF. If not possible, PROTECT YOURSELF with dry insulating material and pull
the victim clear of the conductor.
1. Lay the patient on his back and, if on slope, have the stom-
ach slightly lower than the chest.
2. Make a brief inspection of the mouth and throat to ensure

that they are clear of obvious obstruction.
3. Give the patient’s head the maximum backwards tilt, so

that the chin is prominent, the mouth closed and the neck
stretched to give clear airway - fig. A.
4. Open your mouth wide , make an airtight seal over the

nose of the patient and blow. The operator’s cheek or the
hand supporting the chin can be used to seal the patient’s lips -
Fig. B, or if the nose is blocked, open the patient’s mouth
using the hand supporting the chin; open your mouth wide and
make an airtight seal over his mouth and blow - Fig. C. This may
also be used as an alternative to the mouth to nose technique.
5. After exhaling, turn your head to watch for chest move-

ment, whilst inhaling deeply in readiness for blowing again -
Fig. D.
6. If the chest does not rise, check that the patient’s mouth and
throat are free of obstruction and the head is tilted backward as
far as possible. Blow again.
Send for medical assistance if possible.

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page xix
WARNING - HEALTH HAZARD

Beryllium Oxide is used in the high frequency power transistors. In this form, it is harm-
less. However, is the transistor casing split, the oxide may be exposed and represent a
health hazard if touched or inhaled.
The safety precautions detailed in Beryllia Precautions page of this handbook, must be
fully observed when handling these transistors.
BERYLLIA - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
INTRODUCTION
This appendix details the safety precautions necessary when handling components which
contain Beryllium Oxide. Dust from this material can present a health hazard unless ade-
quate precautions are taken.
THE HAZARD
The material is highly dangerous in a dust form when it might be inhaled or enter a cut or
skin irritation area.
If dust is caused as a result of chafing, filing or breakage and is inhaled, a single exposure
lasting minutes or seconds can cause injury to skin or muscular membranes severe
enough to endanger life or cause permanent injury. Particles penetrating the skin through
wounds or abrasions are liable to cause chronic ulcerations.
Symptoms of poisoning, indicated by respiratory troubles or cyanosis (grey or blue discol-

oration of the skin), may develop within a week, or after a period extending to several
years.
PRACTICAL PRECAUTIONS
Power transistors, diodes and thyristors, as received in the manufacturer’s packing, are
clearly identified by attached information. They should be stored in the original packing
and not mixed with other items. The Beryllia is encapsulated and components are safe to
handle for replacement purposes. Care should be exercised in removing defective items to
ensure that they do not become physically damaged.
They MUST NOT:
A: be carried loosely in pocket, bag or container with other components where they may
rub together or break and disintegrate into dust.
B: be heated excessively (normal soldering is quite safe).
C: be broken open for inspection or in any way scratched by tools.
DISPOSAL
Defective and broken components must not:
A: be disposed of in containers used for general refuse.

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page xx ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
B: be thrown into the sea unless the circumstances make it unavoidable, e.g. broken cath-
ode ray tubes.
Defective components should be individually wrapped, clearly identified as «DEFECTIVE

BERYLLIA COMPONENTS» and returned for subsequent disposal. Such components,
securely packed and with inside identification, may also be returned directly to the manu-
facturer when known.
Broken components should be individually wrapped and identified as «BROKEN BERYLLIA

COMPONENTS». They must NOT be sent through the post and should be returned to a
depot by hand.
MEDICAL PRECAUTIONS
If Beryllia is believed to be on, or to have entered the skin through cuts or abrasions, the
area should be thoroughly washed and treated by normal first aid methods followed by
subsequent medical inspection.
Doctor should treats suspected inhalation as soon as possible, preferably at a hospital.
WARNING ENERGY HAZARD

High levels of electrical energy are supplied by the AC/DC power supplies and distributed
by the 27VDC supply inside the cabinet. Be careful not to contact the connectors supply-
ing the 27VDC, or any component connected to the 27V DC, with any metallic object while
servicing the cabinet.
Note that to fully remove 27VDC turn off both mains AC/DC power supplies/Chargers and
isolate the standby batteries if connected.
Only authorized maintenance personnel shall be given access to and perform maintenance
on the cabinet.

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page xxi
PROTECTION OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AGAINST ELECTRO

STATIC DISCHARGE
ESD - Electro Static Discharge
This electronic equipment and its spare parts are built from semiconductor components
which are sensitive to ESD. The equipment may be damaged or suffer from reduced per-
formance and lifetime if improperly handled during servicing and transportation.
WARRANTY
To obtain the Park Air Systems AS warranty the following precautions must be taken:
• All semiconductor components and modules containing semiconductors shall be han-
dled and transported as ESD-sensitive.
Handling procedure:
The operator shall be ESD-protected by using a portable static-dissipative field kit contain-
ing dissipative mat, wrist strap and ground cord or equivalent protection connected to
same potential as the equipment, see picture.
• The operator must be connected to the wrist-strap

before modules are removed or components
touched.
• Anytime a module must be laid down, it should be

placed only on the grounded dissipative mat.
• All electronic equipment must be properly rein-

serted in the rack or protected by ESD-shielding
bags before protection of the operator is removed.
Nonconductive objects such as synthetic clothing, Styrofoam coffee cups, cigarette

packs, vinyl work order envelopes or common plastics shall be removed from the work
area as they may cause damage to semiconductor components.
Transportation procedure:
Electronic equipment being spare part modules or any faulty modules removed from the
equipment to be returned for repair shall be stored and transported in ESD-shielding bags
or equivalents.
The electro static shielding package shall not be opened without operator and work area
being properly protected as stated above.

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page xxii ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
SHIPPING PRECAUTIONS
Do not ship the rack or subrack assemblies (i.e. transmitter sections) with heavy
modules inserted. All encapsulated modules must be pulled out and packed sep-
arately before shipping.
All modules must be packed in electrostatic conductive (ESD) bags or boxes

before shipping.
NOTICE
Modules used in system, which have the same type of designation, might in particular
cases have different version numbers.
This is due to the production of modules in different batches where certain changes have
taken place from one batch to the next.
New versions of all modules, always replace the old ones.
Documentation of the latest version is enclosed in the manual.
Please contact us if you should need information on older versions of modules for servicing
purposes.

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page xxiii

23137/Rev.1.2/18-Mar-04
Page xxiv ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
1. Section 1 General Information
1.1 Purpose and scope
The purpose of this document is to provide the reader with sufficient information to under-
stand how the NORMARC 7000B-series LLZ/GP operates and is maintained when used
together with the relevant Antenna System handbook. The handbook also contains equip-
ment specific information for installation; general installation information is given in the
Installation handbook.
The handbook is written for personnel with a good prior knowledge of ILS, users should
participate in a NORMARC ILS training course to get the required training.
The handbook covers both the Cold Standby and Hot Standby version of he equipment.
Where relevant, paragraphs are marked cold standby only or hot standby only, or alterna-
tively by the NORMARC type number.
The corrective maintenance strategy supported is LRU (Line Replaceable Unit) replace-
ment. Fault isolation to LRU level is supported by the RMM system, minimizing downtime
caused by repairs.
Repair of LRUs require specialized training and equipment, and should be done by Park Air
Systems or other authorized repair facilities.
1.2 Document overview
Section 1 General Information (this section)
This section contains a general overview of this document, a general description of the ILS
system and a description of the Product Type number system.
Section 2 Technical description
This section gives a functional description of how the ILS rack operates.
Section 3 Operating Instructions
This section gives instructions for operating the system by the Remote and Local Controls,
and it gives an introduction to using the RMM software.
Section 4 Periodic Maintenance
This section contains periodic maintenance tasks and descriptions.
Section 5 Corrective Maintenance
This section contains procedures for locating and replacing faulty LRUs (modules).
Section 6 Part lists
This section contains part lists and part location figures.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page 1-1
Section 7 Installation and Initial Set-up
This section contains instructions for mechanical and electrical installation, configuration
of the equipment, and initial adjustment. The configuration and adjustment instructions
can also be used for maintenance purposes.
Section 8 Detailed Technical Description
This section contains detailed technical description and block diagrams for all the modules
in the rack and in the tower.
Section 9 Appendixes
This section contains the following appendixes:
Appendix A: Listing of all monitor and maintenance parameters.
Appendix B: Description of the optional Far Field Monitor system (LLZ only).
Appendix C: External Power Supplies
Appendix D: User Handbook for the RMM Software
1.3 ILS Description
This paragraph gives a description of a typical ILS installation and the NORMARC Glide
Path system.
1.3.1 Introduction
This is an overview of a NORMARC 7000B ILS system.
1.3.2 ILS Overview
A complete Instrument Landing System comprises:

• A LOCALIZER SYSTEM, producing a radio course to furnish lateral guidance to the
airport runway.
• A GLIDE PATH SYSTEM, producing a radio course to furnish vertical guidance down
the correct descent angle to the runway.
• MARKER BEACONS, to provide accurate radio fixes along the approach course.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
Page 1-2 ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
The layout of a typical ILS airport installation is shown below.
Glide Path Localizer

330 MHz 110 MHz
Marker Beacon
75MHz 3°
HBK547-1
Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation
1.3.3 Glide Path Overview
The complete ILS Glide Path system comprises:

• A GP transmitter/monitor cabinet
• An antenna distribution network
• A monitor network
• A GP antenna array
• Near-field monitor antenna

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
A block diagram is shown below:
GP
TRANSMITTER
U
TRANSMITTER
CSB CL ANTENNA
AND
SBO CL DISTRIBUTION
MODULATOR
NETWORK
ILS Localizer I and II CSB CLR*
**
and Glide Path
REMOTE CL
MONITOR MONITOR
CONTROL CLR*
I and II NETWORK
UNIT DS
NF M
SLAVE
PANEL
24V
BATTERY
L
POWER
SUPPLY
MAINS INPUT
220V/110V AC
* CLR signals only used for 2-frequency systems.
** Antenna distribution network not used for Null Reference.
HBK205-2 *** Middle antenna used for M-Array and Modified M-Array.
GP-BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 1-2 Glide Path block diagram
1.3.4 Glide Path Description
To shape the glide path signal, ground plane reflection from an area in front of the
antenna array is necessary. The specific requirements to the area are given in the antenna
handbook.
The glide path site may be located on either side of the runway, but the most reliable
operation will be obtained if the site is selected on terrain least obstructed by taxi ways,
aircraft holding aprons, parking ramps, buildings, power lines etc. The site should offer the
widest area of smooth ground with possibilites of levelling without excessive physical or
economical effort, if indeed levelling is deemed necessary.
The glide path antenna system should be located at a distance of 75-200 m from the run-
way centre line. The distance from the runway threshold is a function of several factors
upon which establishment of the optimum operational conditions depend. These factors
are:
1. The glide path angle.
2. Threshold crossing height requirements.
3. Obstruction clearance requirements
4. The slope of the terrain in front of the antenna system.
5. The extent of smooth terrain in the site area and beyond the threshold.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
1.4 Product Type Numbers
The NORMARC product numbering system is based on the following three levels:
• System
• Assembly
• Module
Systems have type numbers starting with NORMARC, for example NORMARC 7033. Sys-
tems consist of assemblies, modules and parts.
Assemblies have type numbers consisting of three letters, a three- or four- digit number
and a letter, for example RMA 1215A. RMA is an abbreviation of Remote Maintenance Sys-
tem Assembly, 1215 is a running number, and the last letter is the variant designator.
Assemblies can consist of assemblies, modules and parts.
Modules have type numbers consisting of two letters, a three- or four- digit number and a
letter, for example MO 1212A. MO is an abbreviation of MOnitor, 1212 is a running
number, and the last letter is the variant designator. Modules consist of parts.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
1.5 Technical Specifications
1.5.1 Signal Minimum Performance GP
Transmitter
Frequency range 328.6-335.4 MHz
Frequency tolerance + 0.002%
Output power (CSB + SBO) Course 3-8 W adjustable
Harmonic radiation 2.5 uW maximum
Spurious 25 uW maximum
Output power stability + 0.2 dB
CSB/SBO stability + 0.3 dB
Modulator - Course line
Modulation depth 90/150 Hz 40%
adjustable range 10-44%
SDM stability + 0.8% SDM
DDM stability + 0.2% DDM
Frequency tolerance 0.0
Total harmonic dist. (90/150 Hz) 1% maximum
Phase locking (90 Hz to 150 Hz) 5∞ maximum ref 150 Hz
SBO phase adjustment range + 180∞
Monitoring
Alarm Functions Range (*)
RF power reduction 1-5 dB
Change of nominal CL + 10-60 uA
Change of nominal DS from nominal value + 10-60 uA
Change of nominal NF + 10-60 uA
Change of nominal SDM + 2-8% SDM
Total period of radiation out of tolerance 1-6 sec.
Additional NF time delay 0-20 sec.
Line break, ILS - Remote Control (disable
optional)
Monitor input levels:
Adjustment range, nominal level -5 to ñ34 dBm
AGC range for less than 1% change in 5 dB
SDM
Monitor stability at nominal levels:
RF power values + 0,3 dB
DDM values + 1 uA
SDM values + 1% SDM
Warning Functions:
RF power reduction 40-75% of Alarm limit
Change of nominal CL 40-75% of Alarm limit
Change of nominal DS 40-75% of Alarm limit
Change of nominal NF 40-75% of Alarm limit
Change of SDM 40-75% of Alarm limit
Mains failure
Standby TX failure

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
Remote Control
Data Transmission Medium 2-wire line, 600 ohm
Data modulation serial, FSK
Transmitter level -10dBm + 2 dB
Receiver dynamic range -10dBm to -34dBm
* asymmetrical limits are possible.
1.5.2 Environmental Characteristics
Operating temperature -10 to +55 ∞C
Storage temperature -30 to +60 ∞C
1.5.3 EMC Characteristics
General Specification for EMC/EMI/ESD: ETS 300 339
Spurious and harmonics: ITU Radio Regulations
1.5.4 Mechanical Characteristics
Dimensions: (H x W x D)
ILS Rack: 1020x600x500 mm
Remote control: 129x71x170 mm
Slave panels: 129x41x170 mm
Weight: 90 kg ñ105 kg depending on model
The ILS rack is wall mounted. The remote control and slave panels fit a standard 3U
(132mm) high 19" subrack.
1.5.5 Power Supply
External supply:
Input voltage: 230V +15%/-20%,45-65 Hz or120V +15%/-20%, 45-65 Hz
Output voltage: 27,6V
Output current: 25A max
ILS cabinet
Input voltage 22-28V DC
Current consumption: 8A ñ 22A depending on configuration
Stand-by Battery 24V DC nominal, 85 Ah-140Ah valve regulated lead-acid bat-
tery recommended
Cold standby equipment uses a single battery
Hot Standby equipment uses dual batteries

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
1.6 Physical Organization
1.6.1 Module and Assembly Location
Refer to Section 6 for module location drawings
1.6.2 Service Kit Assembly
The Service Kit Assembly SKA 1229B includes two different extension boards for mainte-
nance operations:
EB 1349A Extension Board - for use with the Power Supply PS 1227, Monitor
MO 1212A, RMS Assembly RMA 1215A, Transmitter Control Assem-
bly TCA 1218A/B and Low Frequency Generator LF 1576A plug-in
boards.
EB 1245A Extension Board with coax cables - for use with Monitor Frontend
MF 1219A and Oscillator OS 1221B plug-in boards.
In addition, the following items are included:

• Static-dissipative work mat and wrist strap to ensure ESD-protected environment
when performing maintenance operations on the equipment.
• Torque wrench, screw drivers etc.
1.6.3 Power Supply
Two External Power Supplies, operating at 230V/120V mains input and providing 27V at
25A, are normally supplied with the equipment. In special cases, a single external power
supply is supplied.
1.7 System Description
This chapter gives a functional overview of the NORMARC 70xxB ILS systems.
1.7.1 Overview
The complete ILS electronic system is housed in a compact, wall mounted cabinet. The
cabinet and the electronics, except for RF units, are common to the LLZ and GP systems.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
Monitor
input Monitor
signals Transmitter
Remote
Control NAV
signals
External out
sensors Changeover
RMS TX control
Relays
Comm.
ports
Data and
diagnostics
Monitor
input Transmitter
signals Monitor HBK573-2
Figure 1-3 ILS block diagram.
The ILS cabinets can be configured for Cat I, Cat II, or Cat III requirements with no basic
changes.
Eight models are available:
NORMARC 7011B Single frequency LLZ
NORMARC 7012B Single frequency LLZ with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7013B Two frequency LLZ
NORMARC 7014B Two frequency LLZ with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7031B Single frequency GP
NORMARC 7032B Single frequency GP with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7033B Two frequency GP
NORMARC 7034B Two frequency GP with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
The system is based on modern technology with extensive Remote Monitoring and Mainte-
nance capabilities, and very high reliability and integrity. To meet this objective, the mon-
itor comparator and station control are based on digital hardware, while the RMS interface
is microprocessor based.
1.7.2 Physical Description
The cabinet contains two sections:

• The electronics card cage
• The transmitter / PA section including change-over relays
The electronics card cage contains the RF oscillators, the LF signal generators, the moni-

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
tors, the station control, the RMS processor, and the voltage regulators.
The transmitter / PA section contains the PA blocks including couplers etc. for each output
with the change-over relays and RF outputs mounted on top.
The cabinet is divided in two parts, with the rear part fixed to a wall, and the front part
hinged to give access to interior of the cabinet.
All external connections are made to the rear part of the cabinet.
1.7.3 Monitors
The ILS has duplicated monitors with inputs for Course Line (CL), Displacement Sensitivity
(DS), Near Field (NF), and Clearance (CLR) (Dual Freq. only). The signals are detected by
the input stage, and then digitized. In the next block they are filtered by a Fast Fourier
Transform performed by a signal processor. The results for each parameter is then com-
pared with stored limits in a digital hardware comparator.
Each of the two monitors consists of two modules. For Cat III use, Hot Standby monitoring
can be added by using one additional monitor and associated RF couplers and combiners.
The design of the monitors ensures a very high integrity due to the use of digital hardware
for the alarm comparators and a very simple Fast Fourier filtering with a signal processor.
In addition, the monitor is checked by automatic self-tests.
The alarm limits are stored locally in EEPROM, and can be updated from the RMS proces-
sor, with a separate hardware write protection to ensure that the integrity is not affected
by the RMS system.
1.7.4 Transmitters / Modulators
The transmitters are duplicated, either single frequency or dual frequency. Each transmit-
ter consists of a RF oscillator, a LF generator, and one or two PA blocks (single or dual fre-
quency).
The RF oscillator uses a synthesizer for easy frequency changes and simple logistics. The
oscillator has two outputs for use in dual frequency systems.
The LF generator contains the circuits to generate CSB and SBO (90Hz and 150Hz) and
keying (1020Hz) modulating signals. It also contains the ident keyer / sequencer and
interface for DME master or slave keying. A digital signal processor generates all signals
ensuring very stable phase and amplitude relations between the modulation signals.
All modulation parameters, such as Modulation Balance, Modulation Sum, RF level, SBO
attenuation, SBO phase, Ident code and Ident modulation are controlled by this module.
The values are stored locally in EEPROM and can be updated from the RMS processor with
hardware write protection.
The same LF generator is used for single and dual frequency systems.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
1.7.5 TX Control
The TX control unit controls the system dependent on alarms from the monitors and
inputs from the local control, the remote control and, optionally, the RMS. It also gener-
ates status information to the same units. The local control and status indicators are a
part of the TX Control unit.
All functions in the TX Control are based on digital hardware to ensure the highest integ-
rity.
1.7.6 Remote Monitoring (RMS) Unit
The RMS unit contains the system microprocessor. It handles storage and read-out of
monitor parameters, measurements for maintenance and fault finding, and performs fault
analysis to isolate faults to line replaceable modules. It is also used to set monitor limits
and transmitter adjustments.
The RMM handles communication to local and remote RMS computers, and in addition it
handles a small display and keyboard for parameter setting and read-out.
1.7.7 Remote Control Unit
The remote control unit is used in the tower or in the technical control room. It has indica-
tors for operating status as well as detailed warnings and an aural alarm device with reset.
It can control equipment on/off and change-over, and has an Access Grant-switch to allow
remote control from the RMS.
The Remote Control Unit is connected to the ILS by one telephone pair cable.
1.7.8 Remote Slave Panel
The slave panel is connected to the remote control by a multipair wire. It is intended for
use in the control tower. It has indicators for normal / warning / alarm and has an aural
alarm device. in addition it can turn the equipment on and off, and has an aural alarm
reset.
Optionally a slave panel with remote control functionality can be delivered.
1.7.9 Remote Maintenance Monitoring (RMM)
The NORMARC 7000B series has a built-in Remote Maintenance Monitoring system. This
system consists of the RMS, remote PC terminals with the RMM program installed, and the
local keyboard/display. Figure 1-4 illustrates the RMM/RMS systems.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
RMM RMM RMM

program program program
RMM RMM RMM
program program program
Modem Modem
Modem Modem
Modem Modem
Modem Modem
Local Remote 1 Remote 2
Local Remote 1 Remote 2
Local
RMS Local
RMS parameter
data bus parameter
data bus storages
storages
RMS
RMS
hardware
hardware
Local
Local
RMS
RMS Maintenance
Maintenance measuring
measuring
core
core data bus
data bus points
points
RMS system program
program
RMS system
Local
Local
Keyboard/
Keyboard/
Display
Display
NM70xx
NORMARC 70xx
RMM system HBK 598-1
RMM system HBK 598-2
Figure 1-4 The NORMARC 7000B series RMM/RMS systems
The centre of the RMS is a CPU with the RMS core program. The RMS collects measure-
ments and diagnostic data, and makes them available to the user. The collected informa-
tion allows easy and cost effective maintenance, fault finding and routine reporting. In
addition, system settings are distributed and parameter readings are collected via the
RMS/CPU.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
External personal computers are used for a user-friendly interface to the RMM system.
The equipment has three serial output ports, typically used to connect a local PC, a PC in
the airport technical equipment room, and a modem for connection to a central mainte-
nance facility.
The local keyboard/display allow readings and control through an LCD display and a
seven-button keypad. This gives access to the RMM functionality without the need for a
PC.
1.7.9.1 RMM Access
Access to the RMM system is controlled by multiple hardware and software access con-
trols. One password is required for each access level, i.e. one password for level 1, two for
level 2 and three for level 3. Optional hardware controls may inhibit writing in the upper
access levels.
The operations that are permitted to a logged on user depend on the logon access level.
The NORMARC 7000B ILS defines four access levels:
Access Number Allowed operations

level of pass-
words
Level 1 1 Read-out of all measurements and all configuration data,
except user passwords.
Level 2 2 Level 1 operations + turning transmitters and LF signals on/
off.
Level 3 3 Level 1 and 2 operations + setting all configuration data,
MASTER 3 Level 1, 2 and 3 operations + setting/viewing users and pass-
words, setting the ILS real time clock.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, more than one password must be entered.
The passwords must be separated with a single space.
The username and password(s) are case-insensitive.
To logon as MASTER, which is a special built-in administrative user, the user name "mas-
ter" and all three master passwords must be entered (logon at access levels 1 or 2 with
the master user is therefore not possible). The factory default master passwords are:
MASTER1 MASTER2 MASTER3
To logon at other access levels a user account must be first be set up by the master user.
If the master user passwords have been lost, the Customer Service department can help
with resetting the master passwords.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, straps on the TCA board must be set to ena-
ble this. Refer to 9.3.3 for more information about this.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
1.7.9.2 Storage Functions
The ILS has battery backed RAM in the RMS subsystem (RMA 1215) board that is used to
store historical data. Four different types of historical data is stored:
Medium time periodic storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters
stored periodically at user specified intervals (see Medium time periodic settings). The
storage contains the last 96 samples.
Long time periodic storage: For every day through a 180 days period, the mean value and
standard deviation of all monitor and analogue maintenance parameters are stored.
Warning storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters at the instant
when a warning LED is activated. The 25 last warnings are stored.
Alarm storage: Samples of all monitor and maintenance parameters for a period starting
from 30s before an alarm occurred and ending with the actual alarm sample. The last
seven alarms are stored in the ILS. Two alarms will be stored in the ILS for each alarm
condition that results in a transmitter changeover that is followed by a shutdown.
Event storage: Stores the last 300 major operational events, including user logins and
logouts, TX on/off operations, alarms and warnings, monitor parameter changes and
changes in system status.
1.7.9.3 Local Keyboard/Display Functions
Through a menu-based interface all main commands, adjustments and monitor limits are
accessible from the front panel keypad and LCD display. In addition a quick-read function
gives read-out of all main monitor parameters at a glance.
1.7.9.4 Diagnostic functions
The system contains internal measuring points and diagnostic functions to isolate faults to
failed modules. The values measured are referred to as maintenance parameters. Please
refer to Appendix A.

23137-I1/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
2. Section 2 Technical Description
2.1 Functional Description
2.1.1 Introduction
The NORMARC 7000B-series Instrument Landing System is a fourth generation system

featuring extensive remote maintenance and monitoring features and systematic use of
modern electronic components and processors.
Careful analysis has guided the partitioning of the system into analog hardware, digital
hardware and software to meet the reliability and integrity objectives as well as easy
maintenance and low cost of ownership.
In the monitor, comparison between monitor measurements and stored monitor limits is
performed by digital hardware. Thus safety critical software is avoided in those functions.
The filtering functions are performed by a dedicated signal processor running a FFT algo-
rithm, with the signals sampled after base-band detection.
The transmitter/modulator uses a synthesizer as a RF source. In two-frequency systems a

common reference crystal is used, avoiding drift in difference frequency. The LF and ident
signals and ident keying are generated and controlled by digital circuits.
Local and remote control, and change-over and shut-down functions are performed by
digital hardware.
Software is used for the remote maintenance and monitoring functions, including alarm
and parameter storage, diagnostic functions, transmitter adjustments and change of mon-
itor limits. Appropriate hardware protection is used to avoid that the software becomes
safety critical.
Technology
Most of the modules in the NORMARC 7000-series ILS are based on surface mount com-
ponents on multi-layer boards. This reduces the number of modules, and gives very good
EMC/EMI performance. Most of the digital hardware is contained in field programmable
gate arrays (FPGA), giving very high reliability. The processors used are well proven
Texas, Analog Devices and Intel types. In the RF stages, modern RF power FET transistors
are used.

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
M o n it o r 1 T r a n s m itte r 1
M o n it o r M o n it o r M o n it o r L F o s c illa to r
in p u t F ro n te n d M O 1 2 1 2 L F 1 5 7 6
T r a n s m itte r
s ig n a ls M F 1 2 1 1 /M F 1 2 1 9
L P A /G P A
R F o s c illa to r
O S 1 2 2 1
R e m o te
C o n tro l
N A V
E x te rn a l s ig n a ls
C o n n e c tio n
s e n s o rs R M S T X c o n tro l C h a n g e o v e r o u t
In te rfa c e
C o m m . C I1 2 1 0 R M A 1 2 1 5 T C A 1 2 1 8 S e c tio n
p o rts
D a ta a n d
d ia g n o s tic s R F o s c illa to r
O S 1 2 2 1
M o n it o r T r a n s m itte r
M o n it o r M o n it o r
F ro n te n d L P A /G P A
in p u t M O 1 2 1 2 L F o s c illa to r
s ig n a ls M F 1 2 1 1 /M F 1 2 1 9
L F 1 5 7 6
M o n it o r 2 T r a n s m itte r 2
H B K 1 2 7 5 -1
Figure 2-1 ILS Block Diagram
Each block is described separately in section 8.
2.1.2 Transmitter
The transmitter section generates the ILS signal with the required RF power levels and
modulations levels. The section comprises two identical transmitters, TX 1 and TX 2,
where one is connected to the antenna, while the other is connected to dummy loads, act-
ing as a back-up.
The reference signals in the transmitter section are RF signals from the oscillator OS1221,
and LF modulation signals (90Hz and 150Hz) from the low frequency generator LF1576.
The LF1576 also generates the keyed 1020Hz signal for the LLZ Ident. System DC volt-
ages comes from the Power Supply board PS1227.
In each transmitter, the RF oscillator has separate outputs for Course and Clearance.
These two channels are offset by 10 kHz for LLZ and 15 kHz for GP. The LF Generator also
has independent outputs for Course and Clearance.
The LPA1580 Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly and the GPA1581 Glidepath Course
Power Amplifier Assembly each contains two feedback controlled output amplifiers, one for
the CSB signal and one for the SBO signal. GPA 1582 contains one feedback controlled
output amplifier for GP clearance.
Each amplifier is controlled by a "Cartesian Loop" feedback. This employs separate I and Q
(in-phase and quadrature-phase) modulators, demodulators and integrator stages. The
demodulators are fed from a directional coupler in the amplifier output, and the I, Q feed-
back loops keeps precise control of output amplitude and phase. The CSB to SBO RF
phase is precisely controlled from 0-360º by the ratio between the SBO I and SBO Q mod-
ulating signals, and the levels of the combined modulation signals accurately controls RF
power, modulation levels and CSB to SBO power ratio.
The Change Over section has relays to connect the CSB and SBO outputs from one trans-
mitter to the antenna while the other is connected to dummy loads. The relays are con-

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
trolled by a Coax-control signal.
The block diagrams are shown on the following pages.
I(C S B )
IN T E G R A T O R I,Q P O W E R
M O D U L A T O R A M P L IF IE R
Q (C S B )
5 0 O H M F O U R -P O R T
C A R R IE R
S P L IT T E R C O A X IA L C S B
R E L A Y
C S B
T E S T
L F C S B fro m 2 n d
G E N E R A T O R I,Q D E - T r a n s m itte r
(L F 1 5 7 6 A ) M O D U L A T O R
S B O O N /O F F
I(S B O )
I,Q R F S W IT C H P O W E R
IN T E G R A T O R M O D U L A T O R B U F F E R
Q (S B O ) A M P L IF IE R
5 0 O H M
C A R R IE R F O U R -P O R T
S P L IT T E R C O A X IA L S B O
R E L A Y
S B O
T E S T
S B O fro m 2 n d
I,Q D E - T r a n s m itte r
M O D U L A T O R
C o u r s e fr e q . c a r r ie r C A R R IE R
S P L IT T E R
C A R R IE R
S Y N T H
(O S 1 2 2 1 )
C le a r a n c e fr e q . c a r r ie r
T o c le a r a n c e t r a n s m it te r
L O C A L IZ E R , G L ID E P A T H
H B K 1 2 7 6 -1 C O U R S E T R A N S M IT T E R
Figure 2-2 System Block Diagram of a Localizer/Glide Path course Transmitter
Figure 2-3 Intentionally left blank

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
2.1.3 Monitor
The monitor section's main task is to generate alarms if a transmitter fails. The alarm sig-
nals are interpreted by the station control section which decides whether to change trans-
mitter or to shut the ILS signals down. Warning information is treated by the RMS.
The input signals to the monitor are RF signals, CL, DS, NF, CLR(2 freq. only), from the
antenna system. In addition the DC loop detects failures in the antenna and an optional
external frontend may monitor alarm generating parameters from additional equipment
(i.e. a far field monitor). The outputs are alarm status to the transmitter control section,
parameter values to the RMS and DC loop reference voltages to the antenna system.
The monitor chain consists of the Monitor Frontend module, MF 1211A in LLZ and
MF 1219A in GP, and the Monitor module MO 1212A. This chain is duplicated to increase
reliability. In hot standby configurations an additional chain monitors the standby trans-
mitter. See the figure 8-3 below.
The Monitor Frontend module is mainly an AM receiver which detects the baseband signals
and generates DC voltages proportional to the RF level. In addition a digital pulse train is
generated, to tell the difference in frequency (DF) between the COU and CLR transmitters
in two frequency configurations.
The Monitor module digitizes the analog signals, filters all data by FFT and mean value cal-
culations, and passes the parameters to the comparator. The comparator generates alarm
signals if the parameters are outside the pre-programmed limits.
2.1.4 Transmitter Control (Station Control)
The transmitter control section’s main purpose is to control the transmitters on/off state.
This is done based on alarm inputs from the monitors, inputs from remote control, inputs
from local keyboard (front panel for station control) and inputs from the RMM system.
The station control receives alarm information from the monitors. Based on the alarm sta-
tus and the current mode of operation, the station control decides if a changeover/shut-
down should occur. The station control unit also receives user/state inputs from remote
control (example: Interlock) and the RMM system (example: Warning lamp outputs). Con-
figuration selections on the TC 1216A board also affects the operation of the station con-
trol.

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
TC1216A Transmitter Control
STATION CONTROL
ALARM
DETECTION
AND ALARM
TX control bus
VOTING
STANDBY
TX CONTROL
ALARM
REMOTE
Station control CONTROL
alarm bus INTERFACE
M1
RC bus
M2
CONTROL
STBM CONFIG AND
UART
RC i/f bus
RMS bus
LC1217A/B
LOCAL bus
Local Controls
Terminator
with/without
alarm bus
M1 hot standby LEDs
TERMINATOR
M2
TERMINATOR Terminator alarm

SHUTDOWN
ALARM
ALARM UNIT
DETECTION
AND
VOTING
HBK543-2
Figure 2-4 TCA 1218A/B Block Diagram
The transmitter control assembly, TCA 1218A/B consists of the transmitter control (TC)
module TC 1216A and the local control (LC) front panel LC 1217A/B (the B-version is a
front panel designed for hot standby configuration). See Figure 2-4.
The main functions of the TCA 1218A/B are performed by the station control (SC) part of
the transmitter control (TC). The SC takes care of the normal operating tasks like turning
transmitters on/off based on various inputs that may affect the transmitter status. The SC
also has a RMS interface enabling the RMM system to read the status of the SC and to illu-
minate warning lamps etc.
The terminator (TRM) part of the TC takes over and shuts the ILS down if the SC is not
able to operate as expected. The TRM shuts down the power to the transmitters approxi-
mately 1 second after an alarm situation or interlock state has occurred.
The remote control interface processes serial data from/to the remote control. This unit

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
also detects and reports faults in data transmission with remote control. The data from
the remote control are sent to both SC and TRM.
The Transmitter control unit displays the transmitter status of the ILS. It also provides a
user interface, enabling the user to perform basic operations on the ILS.
2.1.5 Remote control system
The remote control’s main purpose is to provide an interface to the ILS from the technical
equipment room and the tower at the airport.
The remote control provides the ILS with user inputs and selections. The unit also displays
the status of the ILS using LEDs.
The remote control system consists of an UART/line interface, RC 1241, a front panel, RF
1242A/B (B is a front panel for hot standby configuration) and a slave panel.
The remote control assembly, RCA 1240C/D, consists of the remote control (RC) module
RC 1241B and the remote control front panel (RF) RF 1242A/B (the B-version is a front
panel designed for hot standby configuration). See Figure 2-5.
R C 1 2 4 1
T e le p h o n e
lin e L IN E C O N T R O L
IN T E R F A C E A N D S la v e b u s
S la v e p a n e l( s )
U A R T
R F 1 2 4 2
R e m o te C o n tro l fro n t p a n e l
w ith /w ith o u t h o t s ta n d b y
la m p in d ic a tio n s
H B K 5 4 4 -3
Figure 2-5 RCA 1240C/D Block Diagram
The line interface in RC 1241B converts signals between standard serial data format and
telephone line signals both ways using a FSK modem (compatible with CCITT V.21).
The UART /control in RC 1241B performs serial/parallel conversion. Pushbutton, switch

and operational mode (interlock) status is sent from remote control to ILS. Transmitter
status and other information is received from the ILS.
The front panel RF 1242A/B contains the pushbuttons, switches and LEDs for the user.
The slave panel is an optional control panel with a limited set of functions/LEDs, designed
for use in the airport tower.

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
2.1.6 Remote Monitoring System (RMS)
2.1.7 General Description
The Remote Monitoring System consists of a CPU-board located inside the main cabinet,
with several means of collecting data from both inside and outside the equipment. The
RMS also constitutes the operator interface, offering up to three RS 232 interfaces, and
the Local Keyboard/Display. The main tasks are:
• Collection of executive monitor parameters and maintenance parameters
• Generation of system warnings
• Maintaining historical storages of all data.
• ‘Snap-shot’ of all monitor and maintenance data immediately before alarm occur-
rence.
• Setting of alarm limits and tx parameters.
• Fault isolation.
• Controlling the Local Keyboard/Display.
The RMS SW comprises a resident part located in the ILS. It communicates with the RMM
PC program via dedicated lines or a MODEM. The PC SW is the main operator interface
with the ILS.
Data collection is facilitated in 3 different ways: A parallel high speed data bus offering
both read and write operations, a IIC-standard serial bus, and a set of 24 different ADC
channels.
M A I N CABINET
MAIN C A B IN E T
Remote R S 2 3 2
RS232 R S 2 3 2
RS232 C I 1210A
CI 1 2 1 0 A R M A 1215A
RMA 1 2 1 5 A
M O D E M
MODEM Dial-up M O D E M
MODEM R e m o t e 22
PC 2 D ia l- u p
/ K e y b o a rd
Remote
L C D / Keyboard
oro r
l In te rfa c e
C P U
S e r i a Interface
R S 2 3 2 leased-line
le a s e d - lin e R S 2 3 2 CPU
Remote RS232 M O D E M M O D E M RS232
PC 1 MODEM MODEM R e m o te 1
Remote 1
Serial
LCD
L o c a l
Local R S 2 3 2 R S 2 3 2
In te r fa c e C ir c u itr y
RS232 RS232
P C L o c a l Interface Circuitry
PC Local
a b u s
l b u s
c h a n n e ls
R M S
A n a lo g
IIC
RMS
s e r i a bus
d a t bus
IIC
Analog
channels
serial
data
D ig ita l A n a lo g M o n ito r
aDigital
n d I Analog
n p u ts D Monitor
a ta
Aandn a lo g Inputs a Data
n d
IAnalog
n p u ts S and
y s te m
Inputs S System
e ttin g s
Settings
H B K 5 6 9 -2
HBK569-1
Figure 2-6 The RMM configuration

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
2.1.8 PC and Modem
The main operator interface is locally or remotely connected personal computers, running
dedicated SW and communicating with the main cabinet resident SW via a dedicated pro-
tocol. The system facilitates three channels for PC connections, two of which can be used
for remote PC via modems and leased-line or dial-up telephone lines. All three PC’s can be
logged on simultaneously, but only one of them can have write access at a given point in
time.
2.1.9 RMS Data bus
The main operation of the RMS parallel data bus is continuously to collect data from the
Monitor MO 1212. Additional functions are setting of monitor alarm limits and delays on
the MO 1212, setting of TX-parameters on LF-generator LF1576, and reading of system
status from the TX Control Assembly TCA 1218. Writing of warning status to the TCA 1218
is also done via the RMS databus.
M O 1 2 1 2 A M O 1 2 1 2 A M O 1 2 1 2 A L F 1 5 7 6 A L F 1 5 7 6 A
M O N 1 M O N 2 S T B M O N T X 1 T X 2 T C A 1 2 1 8 A /B
R M S D a ta b u s
R M A 1 2 1 5 A
H B K 1 2 7 9 -1
Figure 2-7 The RMS Databus
2.1.10 Maintenance Data Collection
In order to facilitate fault isolation and presentation, several analog and digital measuring
points are distributed throughout the system. These points are primarily accessed via the
IIC serial bus. In addition, 24 ADC-channels are read directly into the RMA1215 board.

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
L P A 1 5 8 0 / L P A 1 5 8 0 / L P A 1 5 8 0 / L P A 1 5 8 0 /
L F 1 5 7 6 A L F 1 5 7 6 A O S 1 2 2 1 A /B O S 1 2 2 1 A /B G P A 1 5 8 1 A G P A 1 5 8 2 A G P A 1 5 8 1 A G P A 1 5 8 2 A
T X 1 T X 2 T X 1 T X 2 T X 1 C O U T X 1 C L R T X 2 C O U T X 2 C L R
IIC s e r ia l b u s
R M S b u s
R M A 1 2 1 5 A C I 1 2 1 0 A
A D C c h a n n e ls
M F 1 2 1 1 A M F 1 2 1 1 A M F 1 2 1 1 A M O 1 2 1 2 A M O 1 2 1 2 A M O 1 2 1 2 A P S 1 2 2 7 B # 1 P S 1 2 2 7 B # 2
/M F 1 2 1 9 A /M F 1 2 1 9 A /M F 1 2 1 9 A M O N 1 M O N 2 S T B M O N
M O N 1 M O N 2 S T B M O N
H B K 1 2 8 0 -1
Figure 2-8 The IIC Serial Bus and ADC Channels
The IIC serial bus collects digital status information from MF 1211/19, MO1212, LF1576,
OS1221 and the CI 1210 connection interface card. 6 of these are user configurable
inputs/outputs. The LF 1576 boards control one addional IIC bus each. These serial buses
are used for data collection and control of TX1 and TX2.
The ADC-channels are mainly used to measure power amplifier current consumptions, as
well as system voltages. These measurements are obtained from the Power Supply boards
PS1227. In addition system current consumption, as well as several user configurable
inputs, are measured on the CI 1210 board.
2.1.11 Power Supply
The system uses External Power Supplies, operating at 230V/120V mains input and pro-
viding 27V at 25A each.
The cold stand-by models (NORMARC 7011B/13B/31B/33B) uses either one supply or two
supplies connected in parallel. In addition one backup battery set may be connected to
ensure no break operation in case of a mains failure.

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
M A IN C A B IN E T
T e r m in a to r
A la r m P S 1 2 2 7 -1 M O D U L E C O N N E C T IO N S
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C O U _ 1 C S B C O U
A
L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 1
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C O U _ 1
A S B O C O U
T X 1
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C L R _ 1 C S B C L R
A
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C L R _ 1 L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 2
A S B O C L R
D C V 1 5 P
M F 1 2 1 x A O S 1 2 2 1 x
D C V M O 1 2 1 2 A C I 1 2 1 0 A
C I 1 2 1 0 A D C V 1 5 N
R M A 1 2 1 5 A T C A 1 2 1 8 A
D C
V L F 1 5 7 6 A
M a in D C V D D
B a tt e r y W a r n in g L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 1 /8 2
C a b in e t D C
V
S w itc h V 8 P 5 P
D C
D C
M F 1 2 1 x A
V O S 1 2 2 1 A
A C L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 1 /8 2
P S 1 2 2 7 -2
D C A
D C
+ D C
- V
D C
D C
V
D C
A
D C
V
D C
D C V
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C O U _ 2 C S B C O U
A
L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 1
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C O U _ 2
A S B O C O U
T X 2
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C L R _ 2 C S B C L R
A
L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 2
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C L R _ 2
A S B O C L R
H B K 1 2 8 1 -1
Figure 2-9 Power Supply Functional Diagram
The hot-standby models (NORMARC 7012B/14B/32B/34B) uses two supplies, each sup-
plying power to one transmitter and one PS 1227 module. In addition two battery sets,
one for each power supply, may be connected to ensure no break operation in case of a
mains failure.

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
M A IN C A B IN E T
T e r m in a to r
B W 1 5 6 6 A la r m P S 1 2 2 7 -1 M O D U L E C O N N E C T IO N S
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C O U _ 1 C S B C O U
A
L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 1
L o w B a tte ry V 2 7 _ S B O _ C O U _ 1
A S B O C O U
lo g ic
T X 1
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C L R _ 1 C S B C L R
A
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C L R _ 1 L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 2
A C A S B O C L R
D C A
D C V 1 5 P
M F 1 2 1 x A O S 1 2 2 1 x
D C V
+ M O 1 2 1 2 A C I 1 2 1 0 A
- D C V 1 5 N
R M A 1 2 1 5 A T C A 1 2 1 8 A
D C
M a in
V L F 1 5 7 6 A
D C V D D L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 1 /8 2
C a b in e t D C
A S w itc h V
D C V 8 P 5 P
D C
M F 1 2 1 x A
V O S 1 2 2 1 A
C I 1 2 1 0 A L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 1 /8 2
P S 1 2 2 7 -2
B a tt e r y W a r n in g D C
D C
V
D C
D C
V
A C D C
D C
V
D C A
D C
+ D C V
- V 2 7 _ C S B _ C O U _ 2 C S B C O U
A
L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 1
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C O U _ 2
A S B O C O U
T X 2
A V 2 7 _ C S B _ C L R _ 2 C S B C L R
A
L P A 1 5 8 0 /G P A 1 5 8 2
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C L R _ 2
A S B O C L R
H B K 1 2 8 2 -1
Figure 2-10 Power Supply Functional Diagram
The 27V is regulated down to ±15V, 8.5V and 5V. The transmitter power amplifiers are fed
directly from the 27V supply, while the rest of the system uses the regulated voltages.
Current measurements are done on the power supply, the battery and each power ampli-
fier. Each regulated voltage is measured in the PS1227 module. The results are presented
to the user through the RMS system.
When the ILS signals are shut down, the power supply to the power amplifiers are actually
turned off by relays. This is controlled by the terminator alarm signal from the station
control section.
The backup battery is protected against deep discharge with a protection circuit. This cir-
cuit disconnects the battery when the voltage drops below 22V.
A battery warning is given through the RMS system when the primary power supply (sup-
plies) fails.

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04

23137-I2/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
3. Section 3 Operating Instructions
3.1 Main Cabinet
3.1.1 Power on/off
The power ON/OFF switches are located on front of the main cabinet. Adjacent to the
switches are GND sockets for connecting wrist strap to ensure ESD-protected environment
when performing maintenance operations.
1
1
GND SOCKETS POWER ON/OFF

HBK548-1
Figure 3-1 Power ON/OFF and GND Sockets Location
NOTE:
The upper switch removes power from PS1 and TX1. The lower switch removes power from
PS2 and TX2. To fully remove power turn off the mains power supplies/battery chargers and
isolate the batteries.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.1.2 Local Control Operation
H o t s ta n d b y m o d e ls o n ly
T X 1 T X 2
C O U R S E
P A R A M S E R V IC E S T A N D
B Y
D IS A G R
A L A R M C L R
B A T T
ID E N T
W A R N IN G T X T O A IR
M A IN T
S T B Y N O R M A L M A IN
O N / C H A N G E T X 1 T X 2
O F F O V E R
L A M P T E S T
L O C A L M A N U A L
IN T E R L O C K W R IT E
R E M O T E A U T O
O V E R R ID E P R O T E C T
H B K 5 5 2 -3
Figure 3-2 LC 1217A/B front panel
3.1.3 Glossary
Changeover The transition from a normal ILS «on» state (Tx to Air = main
select and active main transmitters on air) to a normal ILS
«standby on» state (Tx to Air not equal to main select, and standby
transmitters active on air).
Shutdown The transition from any ILS state to a normal ILS «off» state (Tx to
Air = main select and no active transmitters).
Automatic When the ILS is in automatic mode of operation, any detected

alarm(s) will lead to either CHANGEOVER or SHUTDOWN.
Manual When the ILS is in manual mode of operation, the ILS state will not
change if alarm(s) are detected.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Interlock When an ILS is in active interlock mode (the interlock signal is an

input to the remote control), the ILS will turn off all active transmit-
ters and not allow them to be turned on before the interlock condi-
tion is removed. This signal overrides local/auto mode of operation,
but not local/manual mode of operation.
3.1.4 Pushbuttons
ON/OFF
STBY NORMAL
Used to:
• Toggle the ILS transmitters on/off. ON/
OFF
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in LOCAL position, HBK603-1
and
• The interlock signal is not active if the ILS is configured for interlock.
CHANGEOVER
Used to: ON/ CHANGE

OFF OVER
• Toggle the coax relay and transmitters between

TX1/TX2 as the active transmitter(s).
HBK604-1
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in AUTO position, if the ILS is “ON”, or
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, if the ILS is “OFF”.
MAIN SELECT
MAIN
Used to:
• Toggle between TX1/TX2 as the main transmitter. TX1 TX2
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position. HBK605-1
COURSE TX1/TX2
TX1 TX2
Used to: COURSE
• Toggle the COURSE TX1/TX2 on/off.
Valid when: CLR
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and HBK606-1
• MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, and

• The interlock signal is active if the ILS is configured for interlock.
CLeaRance TX1/TX2 (Not in use)

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.1.5 Switches/Switchlocks
LOCAL / REMOTE
LOCAL
Used to:
• Select between LOCAL and REMOTE mode of operation. REMOTE mode
of operation will inhibit use of the local push-buttons (as described
above) and the use of the local serial communication port for entering REMOTE
RMS access level 2 and 3. LOCAL mode of operation will inhibit use of
the remote control pushbuttons (ON/OFF, CHANGEOVER) and the use HBK609-1
of the remote serial communication ports for entering RMS access level
2 and 3. Local mode will cause a service condition at equipment and alarm at
Remote Control.
Valid when:
• Always.
MANUAL / AUTO
MANUAL
Used to:
• Select between AUTOMATIC and MANUAL mode of operation. Setting
this switch in the manual position will cause a service condition at
equipment and alarm at Remote Control. AUTO
Valid when: HBK610-1
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position.
WRITE PROTECT
Used to:
• Prevent changing of alarm limits and other ILS parameter
adjustments. Setting this switchlock in vertical/horizontal posi-
tion will prevent/not prevent entering of access level 3
WRITE
PROTECT
HBK611-1
Valid when:
• Always
INTERLOCK OVERRIDE
Used to:
• Override the interlock input to allow testing in AUTO mode. Set-
ting this switchlock in vertical/horizontal position will prevent/not
prevent the user from using the local panel pushbuttons (ON/
INTERLOCK
OFF, CHANGEOVER and the individual TX on/off keys). OVERRIDE
HBK612-1
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.1.6 System Status Indications
Service
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that the ILS is currently in SERVICE mode of opera-
tion. This will also set the remote control to alarm state.
IDENT
WARNING
MAINT
Activated by: STBY NORMAL
HBK608-1
• EXTERNAL SERVICE line forced low (by LF1576A set in service
condition), or
• RMS in access level 2 or 3, or
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, or
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, or
• MANUAL mode entered from RMS, or
• Access grant switch on the Remote Control in grant position.
• Interlock override switch in horizontal position.
• Mismatch between the WRITE PROTECT switch and configuration strap setting on U6
(strap position 6-15).
ALARM
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition.
IDENT
WARNING
Activated by: MAINT
STBY NORMAL
• One or more alarms present. HBK613-1
WARNING
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning con-
ditions.
IDENT
WARNING
MAINT
STBY NORMAL
HBK614-1
Activated by:
• Warning condition(s) detected by RMS.
NORMAL
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS.

BATT
IDENT
WARNING
Activated by: MAINT
STBY NORMAL
• No alarms present. HBK615-1

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
STB ALARM (Hot Standby only) SERVICE STAND

BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition on the

standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not configured
WARNING
for hot standby.

NORMAL
Activated by: HBK635-1
• Hot standby configuration and alarm(s) detected on the

standby transmitter.
STB WARNING (Hot Standby only) SERVICE STAND

BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning con-
ditions on the standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is WARNING
not configured for hot standby.

NORMAL
• Hot standby configuration and one or more warnings

detected by RMS for the standby transmitter.
STB NORMAL (Hot Standby only) SERVICE STAND

BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS on

the standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not config- WARNING
ured for hot standby.

NORMAL
Activated by:
HBK637-1
• Hot standby configuration and no alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter.
PARAMeter Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that there are one or more monitor parameter warnings present. The warn-
ings from the monitor 1/monitor 2 are voted before displayed.
Activated by:
• One or more monitor parameters outside the warning limits.
Monitor DISAGRee
Used to:
• Indicate that monitor 1 and monitor 2 disagrees on which parameters that are in
alarm state.
Activated by:
• Difference in monitor 1/monitor 2 alarm detection.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
BATTery Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS is running using the 27V battery.
Activated by:
• Loss of mains for charging the 27V battery.
IDENT Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ident is faulty for LLZ.
Activated by:
• Loss of ident Morse coding for LLZ.
• Ident continuous for LLZ.
MAINTenance Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that one or more of the maintenance parameter warnings detected.
Activated by:
• One or more maintenance parameters faulty or outside limits.
STandBY transmitter on air
Used to:
• Indicate that coax position directs the standby transmitters to the antenna and the
main transmitters to the dummy load.
Activated by:
• Coax position differs from transmitter main select.
TX to Air TX1/TX2
Used to: TX TO AIR
• Indicate the position of the coax relay. HBK616-2
Activated by:
• Coax relay position.
MAIN TX1/TX2
MAIN
Used to:
TX1 TX2
• Indicate which transmitter that is defined as main.
• Main select position.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
COUrse TX1/TX2
TX1 TX2
Used to: COURSE
• Indicate the status of the TX1 and TX2 Course transmitters. If CLR
illuminated the transmitter is on.
HBK606-1
Activated by:
• Transmitter «on».
CLeaRance TX1/TX2 (Not in used)
NOTE: The TX1 and TX2 LEDs will remain on for up to 10 seconds with CAT I alarm delays. when the
ILS is turned off in AUTO mode. This is because the TX Control performs a monitor integrity
check. If the check fails the LEDs will stay on for 20-30 seconds, and an “integrity fail” event
is placed in the RMS event list. In MANUAL mode the LEDs are turned Off immediately, and no
integrity check is made.
3.1.7 Local Keyboard/Display Operation
ESC PREV NEXT ENTER
QUICK
- + READ
HBK550-1
Figure 3-3 KD 1214A keyboard/display

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.1.8 The RMS Front Panel
The front panel menu system includes a 20 x 4 character LCD and seven push-buttons.
The buttons are used for navigating in the menus displayed on the LCD and to control/
adjust various parameters.
A typical top-level LCD screen is shown in Figure 3-4. This is the screen that is displayed
when the ILS is powered on. This screen displays the following information.
NORMARC 7031B-7032B
[GP selected]
[REMOTE][AUTO]
[RC OK]
Figure 3-4 Typical top-level LCD screen
Line: Description:
1 NORMARC ILS type description or, optionally, a user specified station identification. The station identi-
fication can be entered via the RMM software.
2 If the ILS is configured for interlock operation, this line shows the status of the interlock input on the
remote control unit, or “interlock override” if interlock has been overridden. The displayed text will be
“LLZ/GP deselected” or “LLZ/GP selected depending on whether the interlock input is respectively
active or not.
3 Shows the status of the LOCAL/REMOTE switch and the auto/manual state of the ILS. Note that this
state not necessarily is the same as the AUTO/MANUAL switch position (the ILS may be set in manual
mode with this switch or via the RMM software by logging at access level 2 or higher).
4 The last line shows one or two fields, the Remote Control link status (“RC OK” or “RC err”) and “Acc.
grant” if remote RMMaccess is granted from the remote control unit.
Pressing ESC when the top-level LCD screen is displayed will bring up the main menu
screen, which is described in the next section.
>Read syst para L1

Local settings L2
Syst settings L3
Figure 3-5 The main menu screen
3.1.9 The menu structure
The menu is organized as a top-down tree-structure, where the main branches corre-
sponds to three access levels:
1. Level 1: Basic readout functions.
2. Level 2: Test and control functions.
3. Level 3: System configuration and adjustment functions (requires entering a four
character password).
Figure 3-5 shows the layout of the main menu screen.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.1.10 Operating the different screens.
The menu system consists of five basic screen types; menu-screens, readout-screens,
toggle-screens, input/storing-screens, and the quick read screens.
3.1.10.1 The menu screen
The menu screen is controlled by the key-buttons: <PREV> <NEXT> <ENTER> and
<ESC>.
The menu options are formatted as a long list where each option holds one character line.
If a menu screen includes more than four options, a small arrow-indicator will be dis-
played in the lower-right corner. This informs the user that more than four menu options
are available. The blinking arrow cursor left to the menu-text is controlled by the <NEXT>
and <PREV> keys. The <ENTER> key activates the menu options left to the arrow-cursor.
The <ESC> key brings the user one menu-level upwards or back in the menu-tree-struc-
ture.The menu scrolls down if the user pushes the <NEXT> key when the arrow-cursor is
at the lower line and the arrow indicator is displayed in the lower-right corner. The menu
will in the same way scroll upwards by pushing the <PREV>-key in a corresponding situa-
tion.
3.1.10.2 The readout screen
The readout screens display the various monitor and maintenance parameter readings.
The screens are entered by stepping through the menu options. The <ESC> key brings
the user back to the last menu-screen again. The parameter readings are continuously
updated.
CL readout M1 M2
DDM 0.1 0.1
Al U +1.5 +1.5
Wa U -1.5 -1.5
Figure 3-6 A typical readout screen: CL DDM
3.1.10.3 The toggle screens
The toggle screens offer the user to choose between two or more options. The options text
is enclosed by two blinking square-brackets. The plus «+» and minus «-» keys step
through the various options. The <ENTER> key activates the chosen toggle-option. The
<ESC> keys leaves the screen without activating any of the options.
TX 1 90 Hz on/off
[90 Hz tone on]
Figure 3-7 A typical toggle screen: TX1 90 Hz on/off
3.1.10.4 Input/Store screen
The user can change the various parameter alarm and warning settings in the input/stor-
ing-screens. A virtual cursor is controlled by the <PREV> and <NEXT> keys. An input field
number will blink if the cursor is moved to the correct position. The blinking limit values

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
can now be changed by pushing the plus «+» and minus «-» keys. If the input field is dig-
ital, the valid options will be «False» and «True» when the plus «+» and minus «-» keys
are pushed.
When all the input numbers in the screen are changed to the preferred new values, the
cursor must be moved to the (UPD)-field in the upper left corner. When the cursor is
placed at this (UPD)-field, the brackets will start blinking. The <ENTER> key will now
store the new values on the screen in the ILS. The <ESC> key leaves the screen
unchanged.
CL <UPD> M1 M2
DDM 0.1 0.1
Al U +1.5 +1.5
Wa U -1.5 -1.5
Figure 3-8 A typical input/store screen: CL DDM
3.1.10.5 The quick read screens
The quick read screens are access by pushing the <QUICK READ> key. The key toggles
between the original menu tree and the quick read screens. The <QUICK READ> button
can be pushed at all times, not changing the original menu-screens. The quick read
screens include only the basic monitor readings. The <PREV> and <NEXT> keys step
through the quick read screens.
CL %DDM %SDM RFv

M1 0.1 40.0 3.0
M2 0.1 40.0 3.0
Figure 3-9 A typical quick read screen: CL
3.1.11 The access levels.
The level 3 menu options must be entered by typing a 4 character password. The level 2
menu can be entered as an ordinary menu-option.
3.1.11.1 Level 2
To enter the level 2 menu option, the LOCAL/REMOTE front panel switch must be in the
LOCAL position. The user is denied access if the switch is not correctly set.
Local switch on
Front panel in
REMOTE position
Press <ESC>
Figure 3-10 An access denial screen: Switch in REMOTE position
3.1.11.2 Level 3
To enter the level 3 menu option, the LOCAL/REMOTE front panel switch must be in the
LOCAL position. In addition the WRITE PROTECT switch must be in the horizontal position.
The user must key a 4 character password to enter level 3 access. The access-screen is
operated similarly to an input/store-screen. The blinking cursor is moved by the <PREV>
and <NEXT> keys. A blinking input-field is changed by the plus «+» and minus «-» keys.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
When the correct password is entered, the cursor must be moved to the <level 3 access>-
field. The brackets will then start blinking. The <ENTER> key will now bring the user to
the level 3 options. The <ESC> key leaves the screen back to the main menu.
LEVEL ACCESS 3
M M
M M
<Level 3 access>
Figure 3-11 Level 3 access screen
3.1.11.3 Leaving the access levels
If the user enters level 3, an extra menu line, reading “Leave level 3”, is added in the main
menu screen. The user can enter this menu option to leave access level 3, but remain at
level 2.
To leave access level 2 the LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be changed to REMOTE.
Note that access level 3 is also left when the front panel switches are changed to an illegal
position. (e.g. switch in REMOTE position, or write protect in vertical position.
>Read syst para L1

Syst tests L2
Syst settings L3
Leave level 3
Figure 3-12 The top level main menu screen: User in level 3 access
3.1.12 Function listing
The menu system includes the following functionality.
3.1.12.1 Level 1
Readout of all the monitor values, warning and alarm limits.
Readout of all the maintenance values and warning limits.
Readout of all the delays.
Readout of all the TX1 and TX2 configurations.
Selecting between %DDM and uA unit for DDM readouts and alarm limit setting.
3.1.12.2 Level 2
Ident. configurations with Morse signal settings to normal, continuous, TST or off on TX1/
TX2. Local Morse speaker on/off on the transmitters.
TX1 and TX2: test-signal 90 Hz or 150 Hz dominance on/off.
TX1 and TX2: 90/150 Hz on/off.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Communications.
3.1.12.3 Level 3
This menu contains the same choices as the Level 1 menu, but in addition to performing
readouts allows the user to configure all delays and alarm/warning limits.
3.1.13 The menu tree
The top levels of the menu tree is shown in Figure 3-13, Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
The menu tree
Read system para L1
Page 3-14
System tests L2
System settings L3
Instruction Manual
L3 Page 3
L1
L2 Page 2
23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Mon. parameters
Maint. Val. Lim.
System delays
TX CONFIGURATION
Select DDM unit
DC supplies Ok Mon1 delays

Mon. 1&2 alarm par TX1 COU Ok Mon2 delays Select DDM unit
Mon. 1&2 warn. Par TX1 CLR Ok TX1 configuration
STB Mon delays
STB Mon. alarm para. TX2 COU Ok TX2 configuration
Maint delays [ % DDM ]
STB Mon. warn. Para. TX2 CLR Ok FFM delays
TX Control Ok
INTERNAL CL Ok
FFM 1 Ok
FFM 2 Ok
RMS Ok Mon 1 COU RF
CL CL Monitor 1 Ok Gen : 1.0 COU SBO ATT
DS DS Monitor 2 Ok NF : 10.0 COU SBO PH
CLR CLR STB Monitor Ok Ident : 30.0 COU DDM
NF NF Mon frontend 1 Ok COU SDM
EXT EXT Mon frontend 2 Ok COU 1020Hz LEVEL
Diff. Frequency Diff. Frequency STB frontend Ok CLR RF
DC-loops DC-loops LF generator 1 Ok CLR SBO ATT
LF generator 2 Ok CLR SBO PH
Oscillator 1 Ok CLR DDM
CL DDM CL DDM Oscillator 2 Ok CLR SDM
CL SDM CL SDM CLR 1020Hz LEVEL
CL RF-level CL RF-level COU DDM TEST 1
CL Ident CL Ident COU DDM TEST 2
CL Nominal CL Nominal CLR DDM TEST 1
CLR DDM TEST 2
COU SBO NARROW
+5 Ok RC link status Ok COU SBO WIDE
STS ACT Ok Eprom par error Ok
uA M1 M2 CL M1 M2 DSP PRO Ok Integrity check Ok TX1 configuration
Figure 3-13 The top levels of the menu tree (part 1)

Al U : +11.0 +11.0 uA : 0.0 0.0 DSP ERROR Ok COU RF
Al L : -11.0 -11.0 Al U +11.0 +11.0 DIAG RST Ok
CL Wa: 75% 75% Al L -11.0 -11.0 SYNC ERROR Ok Value 16.8 dBV
+15Volt Ok
-15 Volt Ok
CL M1 M2 RC link TX1 configuration
SDM : 40.0% 40.0% COU DDM
Al U +4.0% +4.0% Value : High
Al L -4.0% -4.0% Normal : High Value 0.00
+5.0 volt
Curr. : High NOTE : The chart does not show all the
Normal : High sub-menus, due to the parameters
HBK 1302/1-1 have similar menus.
NORMARC 7031B-7032B

L3
L2
NORMARC 7031B-7032B

LF Test Modes
Communication
Reset Hist. Storage
Bitrate Local port RESET

TX1 Test Modes
Bitrate Remote1 pa HISTORY STORAGE
TX2 Test Modes
Bitrate Remote2 pa
Ident Speaker
Init modem [ Reset Storage ]
IDENT mode
CL TEST Ident speaker Set baudrate Local
DS TEST
SBO 90 stub [ Ident off ] [ 9600 ]
150 Hz on/off
90 Hz on/off
TX1 IDENT mode TX1 90Hz on/off

[ Ident normal ] [ 90Hz tone on ]
TX1 CL TEST NOTE : The chart does not show all the
[ NORMAL ] sub-menus, due to the parameters
HBK 1302/2 have similar menus.
Page 3-15
23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Instruction Manual
Page 3-16
L3
Instruction Manual
LEVEL ACCESS 3
m m
m m
<level3 access>
23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Mon. parameters
Maint. Val. Lim.
System delays
TX CONFIGURATION
Select DDM unit
DC supplies Ok Mon1 delays

Mon. 1&2 alarm par Select DDM unit
TX1 COU Ok Mon2 delays TX1 configuration
Mon. 1&2 warn. Par TX1 CLR Ok TX2 configuration
STB Mon delays [ % DDM ]
STB Mon. alarm para. TX2 COU Ok Maint delays
STB Mon. warn. Para. TX2 CLR Ok FFM delays
TX Control Ok
INTERNAL CL Ok
FFM 1 Ok COU RF
FFM 2 Ok COU SBO ATT
RMS Ok COU SBO PH
CL CL Monitor 1 Ok COU DDM
DS DS Monitor 2 Ok <UPD> Mon 1 COU SDM
CLR CLR STB Monitor Ok Gen : 1.0 COU 1020Hz LEVEL
NF NF Mon frontend 1 Ok NF : 10.0 CLR RF
EXT EXT Mon frontend 2 Ok CLR SBO ATT
Diff. Frequency Diff. Frequency STB frontend Ok CLR SBO PH
DC-loops DC-loops LF generator 1 Ok CLR DDM
LF generator 2 Ok CLR SDM
Oscillator 1 Ok CLR 1020Hz LEVEL
Oscillator 2 Ok COU DDM TEST 1
COU DDM TEST 2
CL DDM CL DDM CLR DDM TEST 1
CL SDM CL SDM CLR DDM TEST 2
CL RF-level CL RF-level COU SBO NARROW
CL Ident CL Ident COU SBO WIDE
CL Nominal CL Nominal +5 Ok RC link status Ok
STS ACT Ok Eprom par error Ok
DSP PRO Ok TX1 configuration <UPD>
Integrity check Ok COU RF
DSP ERROR Ok

DIAG RST Ok
uA <UPD> M1 M2 CL <UPD> M1 M2 SYNC ERROR Ok Value 16.8 dBV
Al U : +11.0 +11.0 uA : 0.0 0.0 +15Volt Ok
Al L : -11.0 -11.0 Al U +11.0 +11.0 -15 Volt Ok
CL Wa: 75% 75% Al L -11.0 -11.0 <UPD> RC link TX1 configuration <UPD>
COU DDM
Value : High
Normal : High Value 0.00
CL <UPD> M1 M2
SDM : 40.0% 40.0% <UPD> +5.0 volt
Al U +4.0% +4.0%
Al L -4.0% -4.0% Curr. : High NOTE : The chart does not show all the
HBK 1302/3 Normal : High sub-menus, due to the parameters
have similar menus.
NORMARC 7031B-7032B

3.2 Tower Equipment
3.2.1 Remote Control Operation
SILENCE
P ARAM
STAND
ALARM
DISAGR BY
B AT T
WARNING
IDENT
MAINT
NORMAL
STBY
ON/ CHANGE
OFF OVER
RMM
ACCESS GRANT DENY

HBK567-1
Figure 3-16 RF 1242A/B front panel
3.2.2 Glossary
INTERLOCK When an ILS is in active interlock mode (the interlock signal is an

tion is removed. This signal overrides manual mode of operation.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.2.3 Pushbuttons
ON/OFF
Used to:
• Toggle the ILS on/off.
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in REMOTE position, and
CHANGE OVER
Used to:
• Toggle the coax relay and transmitters between TX1/TX2 as the active transmit-
ter(s).
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch on the ILS is in REMOTE position, and
• The ILS is «on» when he MANUAL/AUTO switch is in AUTO position.
SILENCE
Used to:
• Turn off the audio alarm on the remote control (caused by remote status change
from NORMAL to ALARM). Also used for lamp test (all lamps are illuminated when
this push-button is held down).
Valid when:
• Always.
3.2.4 Switches/Switchlocks
GRANT/DENY
Used to:
• Give access grant (access level 2/3) for RMS control of the ILS when the switch is in
GRANT position. NOTE! This switch may be override by configuration straps on U6 on
TC1216A (strap position 7-14). When this switch is in the DENY position no RMS
access (at access level 2/3) is allowed.
Valid when:
• Always.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
ALARM
Used to:
Activated by:
• One or more alarms present on the ILS, or
• Communication failure with ILS.
WARNING
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning conditions.
Activated by:
NORMAL
Used to:
Activated by:
• No alarms present, and
• Communication with ILS is OK.
STB ALARM
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition on the standby transmitter.
Disabled when the ILS is not configured for hot standby.
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter.
STB WARNING
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning conditions on the standby
transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not configured for hot standby.
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and one or more warnings detected by RMS for the
standby transmitter.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
STB NORMAL
Used to:
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS on the standby transmit-
ter. Disabled when the ILS is not configured for hot standby.
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and no alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter.
PARAMeter warning
Used to:
• Indicate that there are one or more monitor parameter warnings present.
Activated by:
• One or more monitor parameters outside the warning limits.
monitor DISAGRee
Used to:
• Indicate that there are one or more monitor parameter warnings present. The warn-
ings from the monitor 1/monitor 2 are voted before displayed.
Activated by:
• Difference in monitor 1/monitor 2 alarm detection.
BATTery warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS is running using the 27V battery.
Activated by:
• Loss of mains for charging the 27V battery.
IDENT warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ident is faulty for LLZ.
Activated by:
• Loss of ident Morse coding for LLZ.
MAINTenance warning
Used to:
• Indicate that one or more of the maintenance parameter warnings detected.
Activated by:
• One or more maintenance parameters faulty or outside limits.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
STandBY transmitter on air
Used to:
• Indicate that coax position directs the standby transmitters to the antenna and the
main transmitters to the dummy load.
Activated by:
• Coax position differs from transmitter main select.
Alarm buzzer
Used to:
• Indicate that a transition from NORMAL to ALARM has occurred. Reset by pressing
SILENCE push-button.
Activated by:
• Remote control state transition from NORMAL to ALARM.
ACCESS
Used to:
• Indicate that access level 2/3 has been granted for RMS control.
Activated by:
• Grant/Deny switchlock is in GRANT position.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.2.6 Remote Slave Operation
SILENCE
ALARM
WARNING
NORMAL
ON/
OFF
HBK599-1
Figure 3-17 SF 1344A front panel
3.2.7 Glossary
INTERLOCK When an ILS is in active interlock mode (the interlock signal is an

tion is removed. This signal overrides manual mode of operation.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.2.8 Pushbuttons
ON/OFF
Used to:
• Toggle the ILS on/off.
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in REMOTE position, and
SILENCE
Used to:
• Turn off the audio alarm on the slave panel (generated by remote control). Also used
for lamp test (all lamps are illuminated when this push-button is held down).
Valid when:
• Always.
ALARM
Used to:
Activated by:
• One or more alarms present on the ILS, or
• Communication failure with ILS.
WARNING
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning conditions.
Activated by:
NORMAL
Used to:
Activated by:
• No alarms present, and
• Communication with ILS is OK.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.2.10 Interlock Switch Operation
The interlock function is used when mutual exclusive operation on different ILS systems is
required. An active interlock for a station shall prevent transmission of ILS signals. The
interlock signal is connected to the remote control RC1241 and transmitted to the ILS
through the remote control connection.
The interlock function on the ILS is enabled/disabled from configuration settings on the
TC1216A. The rest of this chapter describes an ILS configured for interlock.
When an active ILS receives an active interlock signal, the ILS performs a shutdown. If
the interlock signal is deactivated, the ILS will automatically be turned on after a 20 sec-
ond delay period.
For maintenance purposes, an interlock override function has been implemented. This
function makes it possible to operate the ILS locally in manual mode with an active inter-
lock signal. To activate the interlock override function the following conditions must be
met:
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in LOCAL position,
• AUTO/MANUAL switch must be in MANUAL position and
• INTERLOCK OVERRIDE switchlock must be set in horizontal position.
The remote control will always be set in ALARM state when the interlock override function
is activated.
3.3 Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Software
3.3.1 Introduction
The NORMARC 7000 RMM is a Microsoft Windows based application that provides access
to all the data and functions made available by the ILS remote monitoring subsystem.
By connecting to the ILS remote monitoring subsystem, the software lets the user do
the following:
• View the current status and measurements done by the ILS.
• Configure ILS monitor and transmitter settings.
• View reports that shows the current operational status and configuration of an ILS.
• Download historical data from the ILS and browse through individual data sets.
• Download and view events to see the operational history of the ILS.
• Connect to the ILS with a null modem cable (direct), dial-up connection or leased
line connection.
The RMM software starting with version 2.0 supports both the NORMARC 70xxB series and
the NORMARC 7000 series ILS.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.3.2 System requirements
3.3.2.1 Minimum hardware requirements:

• Intel Pentium II 266 MHz processor.
• 64 MB for Windows 98/98SE/ME and Windows NT, 128 MB for Windows 2000/XP.
The software may work with less RAM than this, depending on the hardware config-
uration.
• Hard disk space: About 20 MB excluding historical data storage/database (require-
ment may increase depending on how much ILS measurements one wants to store).
3.3.2.2 Operating system/software requirements:

• Microsoft Windows 98, 98SE, ME, Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 4 or later, Win-
dows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional
• Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.01 SP1 or newer must be installed if the oper-
ating system is Windows NT. The version of Internet Explorer that comes with Win-
dows 98/98SE/ME and Windows 2000/XP is ok.
3.3.3 User Manual
Please refer to Appendix D for the user manual.
3.4 Startup / shutdown procedures
3.4.1 Startup
This section provides a step-by-step check list for starting the ILS from power-off and ver-
ifying that it is in a normal operating state.
Refer to (Figure 3.1) and (Figure 3.2) for switch and indicator locations and orientation.
Location Item Action Indications
1) Initial Conditions
Alongside battery Battery fuses Verify OFF (none)
Below Main Cabinet AC power supplies Verify OFF Power indicator not illuminated
Main Cabinet - top Power switches Verify OFF (0) System is powered off.
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Verify / set to LOCAL (none)
switch
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Verify / set to MANUAL (none)
switch
Local Control Panel WRITE PROTECT Verify / set to vertical (none)
switch position
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK OVER- Verify / set to vertical (none)
RIDE switch position

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
2) Startup sequence
Below ILS cabinet AC power supplies Set to ON Power indicator illuminated
Alongside battery Battery fuses Set to ON (none)
Main Cabinet (top) Power switches Set to ON (1) System will power up.
Local Keyboard/Display RMS LCD screen Verify ILS is not inter- [SELECTED]
locked off
NOTE: If equipment is interlocked off and it is desired to start the system, secure permission to operate the ILS
before proceeding. Then, set the INTERLOCK OVERRIDE switch to the horizontal position.
Local Control Panel ON/OFF switch Press Transmitter TX1 COURSE lamp
will illuminate
3) Normal Indications (during normal operation): Tx1 main , Tx1 to Air

Local Control Panel NORMAL lamp Verify lamp illuminated Green light
Local Control Panel SERVICE lamp Verify lamp illumi- Red light
nated (due to LOCAL
mode of operation and
INTERLOCK OVER-
RIDE if applicable)
Local Control Panel ALARM lamp Verify lamp off (no light)
Local Control Panel Main WARNING lamp Verify lamp off (no light)
Local Control Panel Individual warning Verify lamps off (no light)
lamps (six)
Local Control Panel MAIN lamp Verify that TX1 lamp is Green light
illuminated
Local Control Panel TX to Air lamp Verify that TX1 lamp is Green light
illuminated
Local Control Panel TX1 Course lamp Verify that TX1 Green light
COURSE lamp is illu-
minated
Local Control TX2 Course lamp Verify that TX2 Cold Standby: No light
COURSE lamp is illu- Hot Standby: Green light
minated .
Local Control TX1 Clearance lamp Verify that TX1 CLR Green light.
lamp is illuminated
Local Control TX2 Clearance lamp Verify that TX2 CLR Cold Standby: No light
lamp is illuminated Hot Standby: Green light
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, first line Verify Equipment “Normarc 70XXB” or local name if
name set.
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, second Verify interlock status Either blank line, “GP
line SELECTED” or “Interlock Over-
ride” if interlock has been manu-
ally overridden.
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, third line Verify system switch “LOCAL” and “MANUAL”.
status
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, fourth line Verify remote control “RC OK”.
connection

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
4) Tests and verification

Local Control Panel LAMP TEST button Press momentarily All lamps on.
Local Control Panel CHANGEOVER button Press Verify that TX to Air changes from
TX1 to TX2.
Verify that no alarms or warnings
other than STBY are present.
Local Control Panel CHANGEOVER button Press Verify that TX to Air and transmit-
ter indicators return to original
state.
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Set to AUTO Verify that LCD third line reads
switch “LOCAL” and “AUTO”.
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Set to REMOTE Verify that LCD third line reads
switch “REMOTE” and “AUTO”.
Verify that transmitters remain on.
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK OVER- Set to vertical position Verify that either:
RIDE switch No interlock: LCD sec-
ond line blank, SERVICE lamp off
and transmitters remain ON.
Interlock, system selected:
LCD second line reads “GP
SELECTED”, SERVICE lamp off
and transmitters remain ON.
Interlock, system dese-
lected: LCD sec-
ond line reads “GP
DESELECTED”, transmitters go
off and SERVICE lamp off.
5) Final check
To verify system in normal status before leaving site, perform the following checks:
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK OVER- Verify vertical position
RIDE switch
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Verify REMOTE posi-
switch tion
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Verify AUTO position
switch
Local Control Panel WRITE PROTECT Verify vertical position
switch
Local Control Panel SERVICE lamp Verify off (no light)
Local Control Panel ALARM lamp Verify off (no light)
Local Control Panel Main WARNING lamp Verify off (no light)
Local Control Panel NORMAL lamp Verify on Green
Local Control Panel Individual warning Verify off (no light)
lamps (six)
Local Control Panel Main lamp Verify TX1 on Green
Local Control Panel TX to air lamp Verify TX1 selected Green
Local Control Panel TX1 COURSE lamp Verify on Green
Local Control Panel TX2 COURSE lamp Verify on Cold Standby: No light
Hot Standby: Green light

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
3.4.2 Shutdown
Location Item Action Indications
1) Normal shutdown
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Set to MANUAL Service lamp on (red)
switch
Local Control Panel ON/OFF switch Press Transmitters off; alarm and warn-
ing lamps on.
Main cabinet top Main power switches Set to off (0) System will power off.
Below main cabinet AC Power Supply Switches set to OFF Power indicator off
2) Emergency shutdown
Main cabinet top Main power switches Set to off (0) System will power off.
Note: No harm will be done to the ILS system if the emergency shutdown procedure is used instead
of normal shutdown. It is nevertheless advisable to follow the normal shutdown procedure if
possible.
CAUTION: If the main power is turned off at the shelter circuit breaker panel, the ILS can
continue to operate on battery power. The locally installed circuit breaker for battery
power must be turned OFF to disable battery operation. The main power switches at the
top of the cabinet remove both battery and AC-supplied power from the system, but do
not remove the 27 VDC from the ILS cabinet.

23137-I3/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
4. Section 4 Periodic Maintenance
4.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
This section describes the performance checks that must be conducted in order to ensure
a safe operation of the ILS equipment, as well as where to find the proper adjustment pro-
cedures.
NOTE: The content of and period between procedures given below are Park Air Systems recommen-
dations under a normal operational environment.
The responsible Authority may have requirements that replaces, modifies or comes in addition
to the procedures given below.
4.1.1 On-site Performance Checks
Checks and procedures listed in Table 4-1 are required following initial installation, follow-
ing modification, or when corrective maintenance is performed, prior to returning the
equipment to service. Standards and tolerances for the procedure are listed in Table 4-1.
The applicable setup and test procedure is listed for convenient reference. Since most
performance checks in Section 6 are referenced to maintenance procedures, the section
containing the maintenance procedure is listed here.
Performance check and maintenance intervals may be adjusted in accordance with the
user’s policies.
Performance Check Tolerance or Criteria for Maintenance/ Perform-

acceptable performance ance Check Procedure
Monthly
Observe and record monitor data No alarms or warnings 4.2.1.1
Observe Maintenance Parameters No alarms or warnings 4.2.1.1
Six Monthly
TX Parameters and DC supply Recordings As established at installa- 4.2.1.1
tion and flight inspection
Monitor Integrity Check Changeover/Shutdown 4.2.2.2 or 4.2.2.3
Annual
RF Frequency Check 4.2.3.1 4.2.3.1
LF Frequency Check 4.2.3.2 4.2.3.2
Transmitter Waveforms Check As indicated 4.2.3.3
CSB Output Power As established for facility 4.2.3.4
Monitor Alarm Limits Check As established for facility 4.2.3.5 or 4.2.3.6
Near Field Monitor Delay As set ±2 sec. 4.2.3.7
20 seconds inhibit -0 +2 sec 4.2.3.8
Battery Maintenance Per battery specifications 4.2.3.9
Final Check Visual Inspection 4.2.3.10
Table 4-1 Periodic Maintenance Checks

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
4.1.2 Other On-Site Maintenance
Clean and inspect equipment, inspect batteries for corrosion, cracks, and other deteriora-
tion, check and tighten RF and battery connections as required.
Check any installed environmental sensors and other equipment connected to user analog
or digital inputs for proper operation.
Check operation of interlocks, if installed. Check operation of remote controls if installed.
4.1.3 Off-Site Maintenance
All module and circuit board repair is to be performed off site, at the factory or authorized
repair depot. No modules are user-serviceable.
4.2 Periodic Maintenance CAT I, II and III

IMPORTANT:
No adjustments / alignments shall be done during a Periodic Maintenance.
The parameters should be recorded and compared with their nominal values
only.
Over some time, the parameters may change due to natural variations. Variations of less
than 50% of their alarm limits, are considered normal. If a parameter is changing more
than 50% of it's alarm limit, it is likely due to a discrepancy / degeneration of a module,
cable etc. In this case, the reason for the discrepancy should be searched for. If the result
calls for changing a module, rephasing of cables etc., a flight check is often required to
verify that parameters are inside operating tolerances.
All maintenance instruction items apply to CAT I and CAT II installations except
where (CAT III only) is denoted.
All instruction items apply to CAT III installations.
4.2.1 Monthly inspections
Test equipment
• PC with RMM software and printer
4.2.1.1 Monitor Parameters recordings
Use File/View report to generate a report of all measured values and settings. Print or
save as required.
• Tx2 to antenna. (Executed by tower personnel if ILS is not taken out of service.)
4.2.2 Six Monthly inspections
Test equipment
• Oscilloscope
• Stop watch
• PC with RMM and printer

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
4.2.2.1 Tx Parameters and DC Power supply recordings.
Use File/View report to generate a report of all measured values and settings. Print or
save as required.
Tx1 to antenna. Tx2 active to dummy load.
Compare values with previous recordings.
4.2.2.2 Monitor Integrity Check (Alternative 1)
Can be performed from a remote location if Level 2 access is allowed from a remote RMM
PC or the remote control is configured for combined Main Select/Change-over)
4.2.2.2.1 Check Tx1 Main
Tx1 shall be selected as main and shall be radiating. The RMM shall be connected and shall
display the Event List.
Push the On-Off button to turn off the equipment. Observe the Event List. The events
"Turned OFF" and approximately 30 sec. later "Intgrt test ok" shall occur.
If the test fails the text "Intgrt test FAILED" will occur.
4.2.2.2.2 Check Tx2 Main
Tx2 shall be selected as main and shall be radiating. Otherwise, repeat the procedure in
6.1.9.1
4.2.2.2.3 Store or print result
Use File/View Report/Event History Report to print or store the test result.
4.2.2.3 Monitor Integrity Check (Alternative 2)
4.2.2.3.1 False radiation time Tx1 Main
Equipment in mode AUTO. Main Select Tx1. Tx 1 on.

• Remove the CL monitor cable from the monitor input.
• Note the time elapsed*) from the signal was removed until Tx2 was shut off.
• Record in Table 4-4 line a) the measured delay time from cable removal until the
standby transmitter has switched off. Check that the equipment carries out a
changeover to Tx 2 before shutoff. Record in Table 4-4 line b)
• Open Maintenance measurements window.
• Check that Course Transmitter 1, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V.
• Check that Clearence Transmitter 1, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V.
Reconnect the monitor cable.

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
4.2.2.3.2 False radiation time Tx2 Main
Equipment in mode AUTO. Main Select Tx2. Tx 2 on.

• Remove the CL monitor cable from the monitor input.
• Note the time elapsed*) from the signal was removed until Tx1 was shut off. Check
that the equipment carries out a changeover to Tx 1 before shutoff.
• Record in Table 4-4 line d) the measured delay time from cable removal until the
standby transmitter has switched off. Check that the equipment carries out a
changeover to Tx 1 before shutoff. Record in Table 4-4 line e)
• Open Maintenance measurements window.
• Check that Course Transmitter 2, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V.
• Check that Clearence Transmitter 2, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V.
Reconnect the monitor cable.
Note:*) Near immediate change if short delays are used.
4.2.3 Annual inspections
Test Equipment
• PC including NM 7000 RMM program
• NM 3710 ILS Field Test Set, including attenuator 20 dB or 30 dB
• Oscilloscope
• Frequency counter 10 Hz to 350 MHz
• RF Signal generator including calibrated ILS modulation
• Digital voltmeter
• Wattmeter with probe covering 328-336MHz, 10 watts.
• Stop watch
4.2.3.1 RF Frequency check.
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL and REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL.
4.2.3.1.1 Course Transmitter Frequency
Switch on Course Tx1.

• Connect the Frequency Counter to CSB Cou test connector in the Change Over
Section via a 50 ohm test cable. (Use 50 ohm input port of the counter)
• If necessary switch off the 90 Hz and 150 Hz modulation through the Local Display
and Keyboard or the RMM Program.
Nominal frequency: Channel frequency + 7.5kHz) ±0.002%
Repeat the measurements for Course Tx2.
Record the frequency readings in Table 4-6.

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
4.2.3.2 LF Frequency check.
90/150 Hz MODULATION FREQUENCY checks

• Connect the Frequency Counter to CSB test connector on Course Tx1 Section via a
50 ohm test cable. (Use high impedance input port of counter)
• Turn off the 90 Hz modulation for Course Tx1 through the Local Display and Key-
board or the RMM Program.
• Read the 150 Hz frequency. Tolerance ±0.05 Hz.
• Turn the 90 Hz modulation on and turn 150 Hz modulation off through the Local
Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program.
• Read the 90 Hz frequency. Tolerance ±0.05 Hz.
Repeat the test for Course Tx2.
Record the frequency readings in Table 4-7.
4.2.3.3 Transmitter waveforms checks.
Carry out the tests outlined in paragraphs 4.2.3.3.1 to 4.2.3.3.5 for Cou Tx2. Record the
results of the outlined tests in Table 4-5.
4.2.3.3.1 SBO waveform checks.

• Connect the Oscilloscope to SBO test connector on Course Tx1 Section via 50 ohm
test cable.
• Set Oscilloscope input mode to DC.
• Check that the waveform resembles the graph below, left.
For best signal resolution on the scope, it is advisable to set the oscilloscope in double
sweep rate and FREE RUN trigger mode (“kissing pattern” mode). The two halves of the
30 Hz waveform will then overlap and look like one waveform when perfect power balance
is achieved.

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
DEMODULATOR DC OFFSET APPROXI-

DEMODULATED SBO: NORMAL MATELY 5% OF PEAK VOLTAGE
Figure 4-1 SBO Waveforms
4.2.3.3.2 CSB waveform check. LF phase

• Connect the Oscilloscope to CSB test connector on Course Tx1 Section via 50 ohm
test cable.
• Set the Oscilloscope input mode to DC.
Look for the intermediate peaks of the CSB demodulated waveform. Check that the wave-
form resembles the graph below (left). The intermediate waveform peaks shall have the
same maximum and minimum level, indicating 90/150 Hz zero phase start.
DEMODULATED CSB: NORMAL DEMODULATED CSB: 10° LF PHASE ERROR
Figure 4-2 LF phase check
4.2.3.3.3 DDM and SDM check.
Switch on Tx1.
• Connect the Field Test Set to the CSB Cou test connector on the Change Over Sec-
tion through a 20 or 30 dB attenuator.
• Use a double shielded 50 ohm coaxial test cable. On the Field Test Set read DDM.

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
The nominal reading should be 0.0% DDM.

• On the Field Test Set read SDM. The nominal reading should be 80.0%, or the same
as the previous reading/ commissioned value.
4.2.3.3.4 Ident modulation check. Not used
4.2.3.3.5 Voice modulation check. (If voice ident is used). Not used.
4.2.3.4 CSB output power.
a) Course Tx CSB. Switch off the transmitters. Select Tx1 as Main Tx.
• Insert the power meter into the Course CSB output path of the Cabinet. Switch on
Tx1. Read and record the Tx1 power in Table 4-8.
• Change over to Tx2. Read and record the Tx2 power in Table 4-8.
4.2.3.5 Monitor Alarm Limit checks (Alternative 1)
This procedure uses the transmitter as the signal source. The values in the "Flight check"
window must have been set to values that shall give alarms previously, preferably during
commissioning of the equipment.
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL and REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL.
Log on with the RMM program in level 2.
Open the "Flight check" window and select the Tx tab for the transmitter on air. Then
select the "Alarm limit check" tab.
4.2.3.5.1 CL DDM
Connect a Portable ILS Test Instrument to the test connector "CSB COU".
Select "CL test signal 1" (90Hz dominance). Check that a CL alarm is generated, and ver-
ify that the test instrument reading is within ±1 ìA (±0.1%DDM) of the monitor reading.
Repeat with "CL test signal 2"
Return to "CL test off"
4.2.3.5.2 DS DDM
Select "DS test Narrow". Check that a DS alarm is generated, and note the monitor read-
ing. Disconnect the DS monitor cable from the feed-through connector in the rear cabinet,
and connect a Portable ILS Test Instrument to the DS Monitor input. Verify that the test
instrument reading is within ±2 ìA (±0.2%DDM) of the monitor reading. Use the formula
(DS DDM + DS DDM nominal – CL DDM) to get the actual DDM value. Reconnect the DS
monitor cable.
Repeat with "DS test Wide".
Return to "DS test off".

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
4.2.3.5.3 CL RF alarm
Select "Test RF attenuation" "COU". Check that a CL RF alarm is generated. Deselect

"COU"
4.2.3.6 Monitor Alarm Limit checks. (Alternative 2) (CAT III)
After completion and recording of the alarm parameters into Table 4-9, compare and
check that the values are the same as in the previous records.
External RF Signal Generator applied as signal source.
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL, the REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL and

MAIN SELECT to Tx1.
Switch on Course Tx1 .
Check Monitor 1 first.
4.2.3.6.1 CL DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the CL input connector in the back of
the cabinet.(Disconnect first the signal cable from the Monitor network). Adjust the signal
to the same RF level and frequency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: 0.0% DDM, 80.0% SDM.
Verify modulation setting (DDM, SDM) by checking the test signal with the Field Test Set.
Use the Local Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program to display the measured
values for CL DDM.
• Change DDM from the generator slowly towards 150 Hz dominance until a point
where the letter A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parame-
ter) is shown beside the measured parameter for Monitor 1.
• Check the new generator DDM value with the Field Test Set.
• Record in Table 4-9 line a).
• Record in Table 4-9 line aa).
Repeat the procedure for Monitor 2.
4.2.3.6.2 CL SDM ALARM
The test setup is the same as in 4.2.3.6.1
values for CL SDM
• Increase SDM from the generator slowly until a point where the letter A (indicates

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown beside the mea-
sured parameter for Monitor 1.
• Check the new generator SDM value with the Field Test Set.
• Record in Table 4-9 line b).
• Decrease SDM from the generator slowly until a point where the letter A (indicates
• Record in Table 4-9 line bb).
4.2.3.6.3 CL RF ALARM
values for CL SDM.
• Decrease slowly RF level on the generator until a point where the letter A (indicates
• Record the RF level reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line c).
4.2.3.6.4 DS DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the DS input connector in the back of
the cabinet.(Disconnect first the signal cable from the Monitor network). Adjust the signal
to the same RF level and frequency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: 17.5%DDM, 80.0%SDM.
Verify modulation setting (DDM, SDM) by checking the test signal with the Field Test
Set.
values for DS DDM.
• Increase DDM from the generator slowly above nominal value until a point where the
letter A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown
beside the measured parameter for Monitor 1.
• Record in Table 4-9 line d).
• Decrease DDM from the generator slowly below nominal value until a point where
the letter A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is
shown beside the measured parameter for Monitor 1.
• Record in Table 4-9 line dd).

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
4.2.3.6.5 NF DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the NF input connector in the back of
the cabinet.(Disconnect first the signal cable from the Near Field Antenna). Adjust the sig-
nal to the same RF level and frequency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
Set.
values for NF DDM
• Record in Table 4-9 line e).
• Record in Table 4-9 line ee).
4.2.3.6.6 CLR DDM ALARM - Not used
4.2.3.6.7 CLR SDM ALARM - Not used.
4.2.3.6.8 CLR RF ALARM - Not used.
4.2.3.6.9 STB CL DDM ALARM (CAT III only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the STB CL input connector in the
change-over section. Adjust the signal to the same RF level and frequency as the normal
signal applied to the monitor.
Verify modulation setting (DDM, SDM) by checking the test signal with the Field Test Set.
values for STB CL DDM.
• Increase DDM from the generator slowly above nominal value until a point where the
letter A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown
beside the measured parameter for STB MON.

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
• Record in Table 4-9 line if).
• Decrease DDM from the generator slowly below nominal value until a point where
the letter A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is
shown beside the measured parameter for STB MON.
• Record in Table 4-9 line iiff).
4.2.3.6.10 STB CL SDM ALARM (CAT III only)
values for STB CL SDM
• Increase SDM from the generator slowly until a point where the letter A (indicates
sured parameter for STB MON.
• Record in Table 4-9 line jjg).
• Decrease SDM from the generator slowly until a point where the letter A (indicates
• Record in Table 4-9 line jjgg).
4.2.3.6.11 STB CL RF ALARM (CAT III only)
values for STB CL RF.
• Decrease slowly RF level on the generator until a point where the letter A (indicates
• Record the RF level reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line kh).
4.2.3.6.12 STB DS DMM ALARM (CAT III only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the STB DS input connector in the
back of the cabinet. Adjust the signal to the same RF level and frequency as the normal
signal applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: 157,5%DDM, 80.0%SDM.
Set.

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
values for DS DDM.

ter) is shown beside the measured parameter for STB MON.
• Record in Table 4-9 line lii).
ter) is shown beside the measured parameter for STB MON.
• Record in Table 4-9 line llii).
4.2.3.6.13 STB CLR DDM ALARM (CAT III only) - Not used.
4.2.3.6.14 STB CLR SDM ALARM (CAT III only) - Not used.
4.2.3.6.15 STB CLR RF ALARM (CAT III only) - Not used.
4.2.3.7 Near Field Monitor delay
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to AUTOMATIC, the REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL

and MAIN SELECT to Tx1.
Switch on Course Tx1 and Clearance Tx1.
System Status Indications should be NORMAL and SERVICE
Make an alarm by removing the NF cable to the Cabinet. After the specified delay, the
transmitter shall change to Tx2, then after the same time lapse Tx2 shall shut down.
Record in Table 4-1 line a) the measured delay time from cable removal until the standby
transmitter has switched off.
4.2.3.8 20 seconds inhibit
After shutdown check that an immediate attempted restart of a transmitter is inhibited at

least 20 seconds from the time the standby Tx is shut off.
Record in Table 4-1 line b) the measured time lapse from the standby transmitter has
switched off until the main transmitter is again radiating to the antenna.
4.2.3.9 Battery maintenance
For Hot Standby equipment, check both battery banks.
Check with digital voltmeter that the voltage across the battery terminals is between 27.0
V and 27.8 V. Record in Table 4-1 line a) the measured voltage.
Switch off the mains 220 V. After approximately 10 minutes battery operation with trans-
mitter to air check that the voltage across the battery terminals is not less than 23 V.
Record in Table 4-1 line b) the voltage.

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Switch back to mains 220 V. After 24 hours check that the battery terminal voltage is
again back between 27.0 to 27.8 V. Record in Table 4-1 line c) the voltage. The 27 V can
be monitored from the RMM facility.
4.2.3.10 Final check GP
Check that all electrical contacts and connectors are not loose.
Carry out a visual check outside and inside of the equipment.
Check that all switches and keys are in NORMAL position.
Check that the System lamp status is NORMAL after the switches AUTO/MANUAL and
REMOTE ON/OFF are in AUTO and ON respectively.

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Date
Tx1/Tx2
Azimuth %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM
TRH CL
TRH 90 Hz
TRH 150 Hz
Table 4-2 Field Modulation check
Table 4-3 Not used
a) General alarm delay Tx1 - Tx2 sec

b) Changeover carried out
c) PA 27V level
d) General alarm delay Tx1 - Tx2 sec
e) Changeover carried out
f) PA 27V level
Table 4-4 Monitor Integrity Test (Alternative 2)
Date
Cou Tx1 Cou Tx2 CLR Tx1 CLR Tx2

a) SBO waveform check (ok) N.A. N.A.
b) CSB/LF phase check (ok) N.A. N.A.
c) DDM check Cou (%DDM) N.A. N.A.
d) SDM check Cou (%SDM) N.A. N.A.
e) . .
Table 4-5 Transmitter waveform checks
Date Tx1 Tx2

a) Course transmitter frequency MHz
Table 4-6 RF Frequency check
Date
Tx1 Tx2
150 Hz frequency Hz
90 Hz-Frequency Hz
Table 4-7 LF Frequency check

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Date Tx1 Tx2

a) Course transmitter output power W
Table 4-8 CSB output power
Date
Mon1/Mon2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2
Text Parameter Unit
ref.
a) CL DDM Alarm 150 µA/%DDM
aa) CL DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
b) CL SDM alarm high %
bb) CL SDM alarm low %
c) CL RF alarm dB
d) DS DDM alarm wide µA/%DDM
dd) DS DDM alarm narrow µA/%DDM
e) NF DDM alarm 150 µA/%DDM
ee) NF DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
STB MON STB MON STB MON STB MON STB MON
if) STB CL DDM alarm 150 µA/%DDM
iiff) STB CL DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
jg) STB CL SDM alarm high %
jjgg) STB CL SDM alarm low %
kh) STB CL RF alarm dB
li) STB DS DDM alarm wide µA/%DDM
llii) STB DS DDM alarm narrow µA/%DDM
if) to oii) Hot Standby only

Table 4-9 Monitor Alarm Limits check
Date
a) Near Field Monitor Delay sec
b) 20 seconds inhibit sec
Table 4-10 Near Field Monitor Delay and 20 seconds inhibit
Date
a) Battery terminal voltage volts
b) Battery terminal voltage volts
c) Battery terminal voltage volts
Table 4-11 Battery maintenance
Table 4-12 Not used

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04

23137-I4/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5. Section 5 Corrective Maintenance
5.1 Overview
This section contains procedures for locating and replacing faulty Line Replaceable Units
(LRU).
5.2 Diagnostic functions
5.2.1 General description
If the LLZ or GP fails, the RMM software should be used to locate the faulty LRU.
The RMM software can perform two types of diagnostic tests based on the measurements
made available by the embedded RMS software in the NORMARC 7000B cabinet:
1. “Current data diagnostics”. The diagnose is here based on live data received from an
connected ILS rack or based on historical data sets (snap shots) of measurements
previously stored to disk.
2. Alarm event diagnostics”. This diagnostics function attempts to report the cause of a
transmitter changeover or a changeover/shutdown situation. The diagnose is based
on a particular alarm event in the event list and the corresponding measurements in
an alarm storage that will be downloaded from the rack.
The diagnostic tests are based on passive reading of various measurement points inside
the NORMARC 70XXB cabinet and the data from the executive monitors. No special signals
need to be injected for the algorithms to work (although the transmitters must be turned
on).
The operator needs to be logged in at access level 1 to perform a Current data diagnostics
and an Alarm event diagnostics. Since only access level 1 is required, the diagnostics tests
can therefore be performed locally or from a remote location using a modem connection.
5.2.2 Current data diagnostics
The Current data diagnostics is invoked by selecting the ILS | Current data diagnostics
menu item in the RMM software.
There are two typical cases in which the current data diagnostics function may be used:
1. On an operative ILS system, on which a warning situation is indicated. In this case
the current data diagnostics can be used to quickly find the cause of the warning
without taking the system out of service.
2. In manual mode after a transmitter changeover or shutdown situation (monitor
alarm). The system can then be set to transmit on air, and the current data diagnos-
tics used to locate the module that is causing the monitor alarms.
For detailed information about the algorithms used in the automatic Current data diagnos-
tics, refer to Section 5.4.3.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.2.3 Alarm event diagnostics
The RMS subsystem in the NORMARC 7000B cabinet continuously reads data sets from
monitor 1, 2 and the standby monitor. The last 30 seconds of data are stored in an inter-
nal ring buffer. This buffer is partitioned in groups with different sampling periods:
• For the last 2 seconds, 10 data sets are stored each second for monitor 1 and 2.
Standby monitor data sets are stored at ¼ of this frequency.
• For the last 10 seconds, one data set is stored each second.
• For the last 30 seconds, monitor 1, 2, standby and maintenance data are stored
every 5th second.
When a changeover or shutdown alarm occurs the RMS does the following:
1. Stores the ring buffer with the last 30 seconds of monitor and maintenance data
from before the alarm in an internal alarm storage buffer. This buffer resides in non-
volatile RAM.
2. Places an changeover or shutdown alarm event in the event list. This event includes
alarm state information for each monitor-channel. This information is used by the
RMM software for diagnosing the alarm event.
The RMS keeps the seven most recent alarm storage buffers. A changeover-only situation
fills one alarm storage buffer, while a changeover with subsequent shutdown situation
uses two alarm storage buffers.
No alarm storage buffers will be saved if the equipment is in service mode when the alarm
occurs. (Service mode is activated by any of the following switches: Local, Manual, Write
Protect disable, Interlock Override and the Access Grant enable switch on the Remote
Control.)
The data in the buffers can be downloaded by the RMM software when a user initiates an
alarm event diagnostics (if the data is not already downloaded), and used in the diagnos-
tic algorithms described in the following sections.
The operator initiates an alarm event diagnostics by first selecting a changeover or shut-
down alarm in the Event List and then selects the “Event diagnostics” button.
Once the alarm storage has been downloaded it is also possible to display the individual
samples. This method can be used, in addition to the automatic diagnostic function, to
find the cause of changeover or shutdown alarms.
For information on how to download and display historical data see Appendix D.
For detailed information about the algorithms used in the automatic Alarm event diagnos-
tics, refer to Section 5.4.4.
5.2.4 Manual fault diagnosis
Should the automatic diagnostic functions fail or give misleading results, manual diagnosis
using external measurement equipment can be performed.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.3 LRU change procedures
5.3.1 Replacing units
When replacing any faulty module(s), please follow this procedure:

• Make sure the ILS configuration file from the last flight check is available if one of
the following boards need to be replaced: MO 1212, LF 1576, or RMA 1215.
• Make a print report of the monitor and maintenance values to document what the
key parameters were before the faulty module(s) was/were changed.
• Power down the system.
• Make sure you are wearing an ESD chain that is connected to either the ILS cabinet
or some other grounded point.
• Replace the faulty module.
• Power up the system.
• Perform necessary adjustments for the unit in question; please refer to Section
5.3.2-5.3.10.
• Check the Monitor and Maintenance parameters, make a new printout and compare
with the printed report made when the system was operating normally.
Due to the complexity of the boards and the major use of SMD components we do not rec-
ommend trying to repair modules at site unless specially skilled personnel with extensive
experience in repair techniques and the necessary repair equipment is present.
The ILS cabinet is modularly built up to make it possible to change smaller parts of the
system at a relatively low cost.
5.3.2 MF 1211/MF 1219 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit. Check the settings of the step attenuators on the
old unit. Set the attenuators on the new board to the same settings, and place the new
unit on an extender board.
ADJUSTMENT (DS-CHANNEL):
Pre-check Check that all monitor inputs from MCU are correct. (Use field
measurement instrument NORMARC 3710). Make a note of the val-
ues.
RF-level Set R338 in middle position. Set strap fields S++ on connector P2
and adjust R338 until TP23 reads 240mV. Adjust RF potentiometer
R342 on front of MF 1219 card until DS RF level reads exactly 3,0
volts.
AGC Time Adjust AGC timing pot R49 until DC value measured at TP1 are the
same with transmitters on and off.
SDM Adjust SDM pot R48 until the DS SDM reading is the same as the
value measured with the 3710.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
DDM Check that the DS DDM reading is the same as with 3710 (Nominal
Value may be set in RMM program to give a DDM screen read-out of
0%).
ADJUSTMENT (CL CHANNEL):
ues.
RF-level Set R2338 in middle position. Set strap fields S++ on connector
P2002 and adjust R2338 until TP2023 reads 240mV. Adjust RF
potentiometer R2342 on front of MF 1219 card until RF level reads
exactly 3,0 volts.
AGC Time Adjust AGC timing pot R2049 until DC values measured at TP 3 is
the same with transmitters on and off.
SDM Adjust SDM pot R2048 until the CL SDM readings is the same as the
value measured with the 3710.
DDM Check that the CL DDM readings are the same as with 3710.
ADJUSTMENT (NF CHANNEL):
ues.
RF-level Set R3338 in middle position. Set strap fields S++ on connector
P3002 and adjust R3338 until TP3023 reads 240mV. Adjust RF
potentiometer R3342 on front of MF 1219 card until NF RF level
reads exactly 3,0 volts.
AGC Time Adjust AGC timing pot R3049 until the DC value measured at TP4
are the same with transmitters on and off.
SDM Adjust SDM pot R3048 until the NF SDM readings is the same as
the value measured with the 3710.
DDM Check that the NF DDM reading is the same as with 3710.
CHECK:
Power down system. Remove the extension card and place the MF 1219 inside cabinet.
Turn transmitters on.
Monitor Use RMM software to check monitor readings for all four channels.
RF level should now be 3.0V, SDM 40% and DDM 0,0%. It might be
necessary to make small adjustments to the RF Level with potenti-
ometers R342 (DS), R1342 (CLR), R2342 (CL) and R3342 (NF).
Maintenance Use RMM software to check maintenance values for MF 1219 card.
There shall be no warnings (if the transmitters are on).

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.3.3 PS 1227 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit in the vacant slot.
ADJUSTMENT:
No adjustments are necessary.
CHECK:
System: Remove the other PS 1227 unit. Power up the system. Turn trans-
mitters on and set the correct transmitter to air (Transmitter 1 to
check Powersupply 1). Check the monitor readings to verify correct
transmitter behaviour.
Maintenance: Power down the ILS, re-insert the other PS 1227 unit, and power
up again. Check the RMM maintenance readings of the PS 1227
system voltages; check both power supplies.
5.3.4 OS 1221 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit. Write down the strap settings of the old OS 1221A
(LLZ) or 1221B (GP) card and make sure the new card is identically configured. Please
refer to 9.7.1 to verify the frequency selection.
ADJUSTMENT:
The frequency of the RF output signal is normally factory adjusted. To adjust the fre-
quency, power down the ILS, place the OS 1221 card on an extender board and adjust by
fine-tuning the capacitor C1. Turn off 90, 150 and 1020 Hz modulation tones from RMM
software. Measure the RF frequency at the CSB outlet at the front of the ILS cabinet.
Adjust until frequency is less than 1 kHz from operating frequency. Trimmer C1 adjusts
course and clearance frequencies simultaneously.
CHECK:
Power down the system and place the card inside cabinet.
Maintenance Check the maintenance parameters for the OS 1221 unit.
5.3.5 MO 1212 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
• Power down system. Remove old unit.
• Compare the version numbers of the removable EPROM on the card. Make sure the
new unit contains the same or newer EPROM software version.
• Place the new card in the vacant slot.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
ADJUSTMENT:
1. Use RMM software to upload configuration to the replaced monitor board.
2. Check that the CL, DS, NF and CLR measurements in the RMM software are the
same as before the replacement. Adjust the channel gains on the corresponding
monitor frontend board if any discrepancies are seen.
CHECK:
Verify monitor limits with an external ILS generator, as described in Section 4.
Monitor Make sure the ILS is operating in normal state (transmitters on)
and check that all parameters are normal.
Maintenance Check the maintenance parameters for the MO 1212 unit.
Final Make a printout of the monitor values (Print Report) and settings.
Compare with previous report taken before the board was replaced.
Check that the alarm limits and delays are the same as before.
5.3.6 TCA 1218 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit.
ADJUSTMENT:
Make sure that all configuration straps (U1) are set as on the previous module. The best
way to do this is to exchange the U1 component platform.
Compare the version numbers of the EPROM- and FPGA units on the board. Make sure the
new unit contains the same EPROM and FPGA versions.
CHECK:
Start up: Check that the ILS front panel display shows the correct equipment
setting (e.g. NORMARC 7013B Two-frequency Localizer).
Maintenance: Check the maintenance parameters for the TCA 1218 unit.
Front Panel: Set the local/remote switch in local position and the auto/manual
switch in manual position. Check that it is possible to turn transmit-
ters on/off and perform a changeover.
Integrity test: Turn main transmitter(s) on. Set the auto/manual switch in auto
position. Use RMM software to switch off the 90 Hz tones of both
main transmitters. Observe that a changeover, and after a while a
shutdown takes place.
For more extensive integrity testing of the monitors, please refer to Section 4.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.3.7 RMA 1215
5.3.7.1 RMA 1215 Battery replacement
Before battery replacement, download configuration from RMA 1215 as configuration data
may be lost during battery replacement. If required, upload configuration after the battery
change.
Warning Lithium Battery Safety Hazard
Cabinet contains a Lithium Battery coin type CR2032 located on board RM 1213. Replace
only with CR2032 type battery and install with + pole facing out as marked on battery
holder.
Following precautions for Safe Handling and Use of Lithium Batteries should be noted:
• Do not disassemble, crush, expose to fire or high temperatures/sunlight.
• Do not short or install with incorrect polarity.
• Dispose in accordance with appropriate regulations. Lithium button cell batteries
such as CR2032 contains so little lithium that it can normally be disposed of in the
normal municipal waste stream.
5.3.7.2 RMA 1215 Module replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit. Compare the version numbers of the removable
RMS EPROM on the board. Make sure the new unit contains the same or newer EPROM
software version.
Insert jumpers S1 to connect to battery. If already inserted - change battery.
ADJUSTMENT:
• Use RMM software to upload configuration to RMA 1215.
• The following settings are not stored in the configuration file and must be manually
updated: ILS Date/time, Modem configuration, User configuration, Lamp mappings
and Medium storage sample interval.
• If the version number of the RMS EPROM is lower than 13, it is necessary to upload
configuration to monitor 1, 2 and standby monitor if present. Note that if this is done
it is also necessary to perform a monitor limits test as described in Section 4.
CHECK:
Maintenance Check the maintenance parameters for the RMA 1215 unit.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.3.8 LF 1576 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit on an extender board.
ADJUSTMENT:
Turn on transmitters. It is important to use RMM software to upload LF 1576-configuration

to ILS. When the LF-configuration has been correctly uploaded, only minor adjustments
should be necessary. (Follow the procedure in Section 5 to re-adjust both/all transmit-
ters.)
CHECK:
Maintenance Check the maintenance parameters for the replaced LF 1576 board.
Transmitters Check waveforms as described in Sections 5 and 7 for all transmit-

ters.
5.3.9 Coaxial relay
PREPARATIONS:
Remove old unit and mount new unit in the cabinet.
ADJUSTMENT:
None.
CHECK:
Set the equipment in LOCAL and MANUAL. Set MAIN SELECT and TX TO AIR to TX1. Turn
on TX1 COURSE and TX1 CLEARANCE (if applicable) by the TX1 pushbuttons. Leave TX2
off. Verify that the monitor 1 and monitor 2 readings for CL, DS and CLR are normal. Turn
off the transmitters.
Set MAIN SELECT and TX TO AIR to TX2. Turn on TX2 COURSE and TX2 CLEARANCE (if
applicable) by the TX2 pushbuttons. Leave TX1 off. Verify that the monitor 1 and monitor
2 readings for CL, DS and CLR are normal. Turn off the transmitters. Set the equipment to
AUTO and REMOTE.
5.3.10 LPA 1580/GPA 1581/GPA 1582 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit in cabinet.
ADJUSTMENT:
Turn on transmitters. Follow the procedure below to check/re-adjust the transmitters.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
CHECK:
Check waveforms as described here and in Section 7.
5.3.10.1 Adjustment of the I Q ILS transmitter
Field adjustment of the transmitter may normally only be necessary in the following situa-
tions:
• Installing a new system
• Changing channel frequency of existing system
• Replacing a faulty unit
The following procedure describes how the LPA/GPA modules should be checked/aligned if
a major discrepancy is observed. It may be necessary to carry out the procedure during
the installation phase of a new installation, if the channel frequency of the system is being
changed or when a replacement module is put into the system.
At the end of the procedure there is also a description describing how to set system
parameters as DDM, SDM CSB/SBO phase even if these parameter adjustment really are
system adjustments and will normally be done during antenna system alignment.
5.3.10.2 Detailed alignment of LPA/GPA module.
All adjustments is to be accessed via the RMM program logged in as level 3 user or higher.
The alignments are to be carried out both for CSB and for SBO. The parameters to read
and adjust for the SBO transmitter are given in brackets after the CSB parameter.
5.3.10.3 List of external test instruments.
DDM-meter / PIR
RF-power meter
LF-oscilloscope
5.3.10.4 Loop phase optimisation
Explanation:
Provide optimal (symmetrical) operating point for the phase/amplitude feedback signal
into the Error Amplifier.
Open Transmitter settings window. Select PA Adj. tab. Select Transmitter TXx COU. Select
Loop phase tab. Click Enable test mode.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 5-1 Figure 1: Loop Phase Tab
Observe Demodulator CSB/SBO angle measurements, they shall be -135° ±10°.
If the angle range is outside the range, adjust the value for CSB (SBO) Loop until the
angle is within the range given in the adjustment range
For adjustment double click on CSB (SBO) Loop Phase or select the parameter by clicking
on it and then click the Edit button.
Deactivate the Enable Test mode.

23137-I5/Rev.3/27-May-04
5.3.11 Offset adjustment CSB
Explanation:
Cancel demodulator dc offsets, i.e. provide zero dc output signal with no rf input signal to
the demodulator. In the SBO transmitter set a balanced SBO signal.
Connect a LF oscilloscope to CSB BNC test connector on TXx. Observe the normal demod-
ulated CSB waveform.
CSB
5
CSB
4
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Select Offset tab. Click Enable test mode. Click on I-signal radio button. Observe feedback
message: Q off.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
1. Select Tx
2. Activate 3. Observe
4. Adjust
Figure 5-2 Offset Tab
Observe on the scope that the normal CSB waveform has changed to a lower level single
tone demodulated pattern. (Expand the scope level).
SBO: 90 Hz off and DC Offset
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,5
0,5
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Figure 5-3 Before adjustment
SBO: 90 Hz off
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,5
0,5
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Figure 5-4 After adjustment

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
If the peak values levels are not equal, double click on CSB OFFSET I and adjust the value
until the peak levels are equal. Close the adjustments window.
Click on Q-signal radio button. Observe that text changes to I-Off. If the peak values lev-
els are not equal, double click on CSB OFFSET Q and adjust the value until the peak levels
are equal. Close the adjustments window.
5.3.12 Offset adjustment SBO (n/a for GP CLR transmitter)
Explanation:
Cancel demodulator dc offsets, i.e. provide zero dc output signal with no rf input signal to
the demodulator. In the SBO transmitter set a balanced SBO signal.
Move the oscilloscope to the SBO BNC test connector. Observe the normal demodulated
SBO waveform.
SBO: Normal signal
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Select Offset tab. Click Enable test mode. Click on I-signal radio button. Observe feedback
message: Q off.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
1. Select Tx
2. Activate 3. Observe
4. Adjust
Figure 5-5 Offset Tab
Observe on the scope that the SBO waveform has decreased in level.
SBO: DC Offset Error
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Figure 5-6 Before adjustment
SBO: Normal signal
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Figure 5-7 After adjustment

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Look for the smallest level peaks. If the peak values levels are not equal, double click on
SBO OFFSET I and adjust the value until the peak levels are equal. Close the adjustments
window.
Click on Q-signal radio button. Observe that text changes to I-Off. If the peak values lev-
els are not equal, double click on SBO OFFSET Q and adjust the value until the peak levels
are equal. Close the adjustments window.
Deactivate the Enable Test mode.
5.3.13 Calibrate internal power measurements
Connect a calibrated power meter to the CSB (SBO) output of the Cabinet. Switch on TXx
to air.
Select Power tab. If the displayed value differs from the external power meter value,
adjust CSB forward Power (SBO forward Power) scaling factor.
1. Select Tx
2. Observe
3. Adjust
Figure 5-8 Power Tab

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.4 Detailed description of the automatic diagnostic algorithms
5.4.1 Overview
The following sections begins with a description of the diagnostic solutions that may be
reported by the software, then continues with detailed descriptions of the Current data
diagnostics and the Alarm event diagnostics function.
5.4.2 Possible diagnostic solutions
The following table lists and describes the diagnostic solutions that may be reported by
the diagnostic functions in the RMM software.
Diagnostic solution Description

MONITOR 1 Monitor 1 (MO1212) (LRU)
MONITOR 2 Monitor 2 (MO1212) (LRU)
STDBY MON Standby monitor (MO1212) (LRU)
LF GENERATOR 1 LF generator 1 (LF1576) (LRU)
LF GENERATOR 2 LF generator 2 (LF1576) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONTEND 1 Monitor frontend 1 (MF1211/19) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONTEND 2 Monitor frontend 2 (MF1211/19) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONTEND STANDBY Standby monitor frontend (MF1211/19) (LRU)
OSCILLATOR 1 Oscillator 1 (OS1221) (LRU)
OSCILLATOR 2 Oscillator 2 (OS1221) (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX1 COURSE LPA/GPA TX1 COURSE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX1 CLEARANCE LPA/GPA TX1 CLEARANCE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX2 COURSE LPA/GPA TX2 COURSE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX2 CLEARANCE LPA/GPA TX2 CLEARANCE (LRU)
RMS BOARD RMS board (RMA1215) (LRU)
POWER SUPPLY 1 Power supply 1 (PS1227) (LRU)
POWER SUPPLY 2 Power supply 2 (PS1227) (LRU)
EXTERNAL POWER External power.
EXTERNAL FACTOR An external factor influencing monitor measurements.
COMMON CABLING Cabling or any part of the system that is common for the
transmitters or monitor system, e.g. antenna element,
cable, distribution- or monitoring networks.
TX CONTROL TX control board (TCA1218) (LRU)
REMOTE CONTROL Remote control unit (RCA1240) (LRU) or its communication
link.
ANTENNA SYSTEM Antenna system.
USER INPUT User defined input on CI1210 is in warning state.
UNABLE TO ISOLATE The diagnostic function was unable to determine a possible
faulty module.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.4.3 Current data diagnostics
The following sub-sections describes the tests performed by the RMM software for current
data diagnostics. All diagnostic solutions detected are recorded and presented to the oper-
ator. If a diagnostic solution is found to be the result of more than one test, the solution
that is the result of most tests will be listed first.
5.4.3.1 I2C read error on any board implies a failure on that board
If a board is reported with “ERROR” status there is probably a fault on this board. “ERROR”
indicates that the RMS does not detect valid I2C-bus acknowledge signals from the board
when attempting to read its maintenance data. All boards, except the TX Control board, in
the NORMARC 70XXB cabinet have an I2C-interface to the RMS board.
Note: If several boards are indicated with “ERROR” status, the problem may be a faulty I2C inter-
face on the RMS board, or any of the boards may have a “stuck-at” error on the I2C bus sig-
nals. If both the COU and CLR transmitters are instructed with “ERROR” status, the problem
may be a faulty I2C interface or RMS bus communication with the corresponding LF generator
board.
5.4.3.2 Maintenance parameter warnings
5.4.3.2.1 External power supply tests
DIAGNOSTIC ALGORITHM:
If there is a maintenance warning indication on the external power module, there is a

problem with the 27V power supply, the battery chargers or the system is on battery
operation.
5.4.3.2.2 Power supply 1 and 2 tests
1. If there is a maintenance warning indication on power supply 1 and not on power
supply 2, or vice versa, there is a fault on the power supply which has the warning.
2. If there is a maintenance warning on both power supply boards AND not on the
external power module both power supplies are faulty.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.4.3.2.3 Maintenance warnings without follow-errors
A maintenance warning on a board listed in the following table indicates that there is a
fault on that board.
Board
LF generator 1 or 2
Oscillator 1 or 2
RMS board
Monitor 1 or 2
TX Control board
User defined inputs
5.4.3.2.4 Power amplifier tests
Warnings on a PA implies PA failure if there is no warning or error on the corresponding OS

or LF.
DESCRIPTION:
The algorithm assumes that a warning indication on any of the measurements on a PA

means there is a failure on this PA, if the corresponding OS and LF have no maintenance
warning indications. (A fault on the OS and LF may cause a warning on the PA.)
5.4.3.2.5 Monitor 1 and 2 frontend tests
Warning on monitor frontend 1 implies monitor frontend 1 failure if there is no warning on

monitor frontend 2 and vice versa.
DESCRIPTION:
The maintenance measurements from the monitor frontend boards will be affected by the
monitor input signals, i.e. the diagnostic algorithm can not use these measurements alone
to reliably diagnose fault on the monitor frontend boards. The algorithm assumes that
both frontends are fed the same input signals. If a maintenance warning then exists on
one, but not both of the boards, this board is assumed to be faulty. If maintenance warn-
ings exists on both boards no knowledge is gained about monitor frontend health status.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.4.3.2.6 Remote control tests
If there is a “RC link status” warning, there is a problem with the remote control or its
data link.
DESCRIPTION:
A warning on the RC link status indicates that the TXC does not receive valid data from the
remote control unit.
5.4.3.2.7 Transmitter control tests
TX control “EPROM check” or “Integrity check” warnings indicate a failure on the TXC
board.
5.4.3.2.8 Standby monitor tests
If there is a warning on the standby monitor board this board is faulty.
5.4.3.2.9 Standby monitor frontend tests
If there is a warning on the standby monitor frontend board AND there is no warning or
alarm indication on the standby monitor measurements then the standby monitor fron-
tend board is faulty.
5.4.3.2.10 User defined parameters
If there is a warning on any of the user defined inputs then “User defined input” is faulty.
5.4.3.3 Monitor self-test error
Monitor self-test failure indicates an error on the monitor board that reports this failure.
5.4.3.4 Monitor DC-loop alarm
If both monitor 1 AND monitor 2 reports DC-loop alarms or warnings the antenna has a
broken element.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.4.3.5 Monitor warning tests
Figure 5-9 illustrates the tests done by the RMM software for automatically diagnosing
faults that result in monitor 1 and 2 warning indications.
Start monitor
warning tests.
CL or DS CLR warning
NF warning on DF warning on
warning on both No No on both No
both monitors? both monitors?
monitors? monitors?
Yes Yes No
Yes
Yes
Warning on NF
RF on one or No
Warning on both mon.?
Yes
active OS?
Yes
No
Active OS is faulty
Common cabling is "External factor" is

Warning on faulty reported as faulty.
Yes
active LF?
No Active LF is faulty
Active course or
clearance PA is faulty
Monitor warning
tests done.
Figure 5-9 Flow diagram for Monitor warning tests.
5.4.3.6 Monitor disagree
If one monitor indicates delayed warning, raw alarm or alarm on any parameter and the
other monitor does not, then the monitor which indicates the delayed warning, raw alarm
or alarm is probably faulty.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.4.4 Alarm event diagnostics
5.4.4.1 Changeover without shutdown
The flow diagram in Figure 5-10 describes the algorithm used to diagnosing a changeover
alarm that is not followed by a shutdown alarm. The RMM software uses the maximum
configured monitor alarm delay to determine whether a changeover alarm is followed by a
shutdown. If no shutdown alarm event occurred within the maximum configured alarm
delay after the changeover alarm event this algorithm will be used.
No maintenance
Start changeover
warnings
diagnostics
CL or DS Main COU TX is
Maint warn on Main OS is faulty Yes
Yes alarm? faulty
main OS?
No
No
External obstruction
NF alarm? Yes is blocking signal
Maint warn on
Yes Main LF is faulty
main LF?
No
No
Main CLR TX is
CLR alarm? Yes
faulty
Maint warn on Main COU TX is
Yes
main COU TX? faulty
No
No
DF alarm? Yes Main OS is faulty

Maint warn on Main CLR TX is
Yes
main CLR TX? faulty
No
No
Unable to diagnose
fault
No maintenance
warnings
Changeover
diagnose done
Figure 5-10 Flow diagram for diagnosing a changeover-only alarm.
5.4.4.2 Changeover with subsequent shutdown
A changeover alarm event that is followed by a shutdown alarm event within the maxi-
mum configured monitor delay will be diagnosed as described in this section. The algo-
rithm used depends on the voting configuration.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
5.4.4.3 Algorithm for systems with 2/2 voting
Figure 5-11 shows the flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown situations on
systems with 2/2 voting.
DESCRIPTION:
The algorithm is based on the fact that a fault (in a 2/2 voting system) which causes a
complete shutdown, must be some point that is common for the transmitter section and
the monitoring section.
Start changeover/
shutdown diagnose.
Is NF DDM or SDM External obstruction

alarm the cause of Yes
is faulty.
both alarms?
No
Is there maint.
The TXC board is
warnings on the Yes
faulty.
TXC board?
No
Common cabling is
faulty.
No
Changeover/ shutdown
diagnose done.
Figure 5-11 Flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown alarms.

23137-I5/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
6. Section 6 Parts List
6.1 Parts Lists
This section contains a tabulation of electrical and certain mechanical assemblies and
parts; i.e. chassis-mounted components, circuit cards assemblies, and modules of the
equipment to the lowest replaceable unit (LRU).
6.1.1 Explanation of Parts Lists Form

• Symbol/Item No.: References the symbol and item no. for each replaceable elec-
tronic part in the equipment.
• Fig. No.: Lists the figure no of the illustration in which the part is shown.
• Manufacturers Part No.: Park Air Systems part number.
• UOC: Usable on Code: Lists the code assigned to equipment model numbers and
identifies the components used in each model configuration. Se Usable On Code
Index.

23137-I6/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
6.1.2 Parts Lists.
Electronic Subsystems group

Symbol/ Fig No Description Manufac- UOC Qty/ Qty/
Item No turers 7031B 7032B
Part No
NM 7031B 6-1 NORMARC 7031B Glide Path Cabinet 22935 A X -
NM 7032B 6-1 NORMARC 7032B Glide Path Cabinet 22936 B - X
6-1 GCA 1585A GP Single-freq. Cab.Ass. 22279 A X -
6-1 GCA 1585B GP Single-freq. Cab.Ass. 22280 B - X
CB1, CB2 6-1 Circuit Breaker 23130 C, D 2 2

F07 6-3 Fuse 13368 C, D 1 1
C01, C02 6-3 Capacitor 10533 C, D 1 2
M2 6-1 Cover Plate 22479 C, D 1 1
M1 6-1 Front Panel, Top 22488 C, D 1 1
M3 6-1 Front Panel 22819 C, D 1 1
M4 6-1 Front Cover 22537 C, D 2 2
M5 6-1 Collar Screw 22486 C, D 24 24
SPL 6-2 Power splitter 11533 C, D 3 3
MF 1219A 6-1 MF 1219A GP Monitor Frontend 18584 C, D 2 3

PS 1227C 6-1 PS 1227C Power Supply 23088 C, D 2 2
OS 1221B 6-1 OS 1221B GP RF-oscillator 18594 C, D 2 2
MO 1212A 6-1 MO 1212A Monitor 18567 C, D 2 3
MB 1575A 6-2 MB 1575A Motherboard 22390 C, D 1 1
TCA 1218A 6-1 TCA 1218A TX Control Assembly 18510 C 1 0
TCA 1218B 6-1 TCA 1218B TX Control Assembly 18511 D 0 1
RMA 1215A 6-1 RMA 1215A RMS Assembly 18509 C, D 1 1
LF 1576A 6-1 LF 1576A LF-generator 22441 C, D 2 2
GPA 1581A 6-1 GPA 1581A GP Power Amp. Assy 22273 C, D 2 2
RL1,RL2 6-2 Relay 13124 C, D 2 2
DL1, DL2 6-2 Dummy Load 10602 C, D 2 2
DC 420C 6-2 DC 420A Directional Coupler 16577 C, D 1 3
AT01, AT02, 6-2 Attentuator 20dB BNC 11722 D 0 2
AT03
CI 1210A 6-3 CI 1210A Connection Interface Board 18561 C, D 1 1

BW 1566A 6-3 BW 1566A Battery Warning 22229 D 0 1
F1,F4 6-3 Fuse 13362 C,D 2 2
J8,J21,J26 6-3 Connector (CI 1210) 12408 C, D 3 3
J9-J17, J20, 6-3 Connector (CI 1210) 12406 C, D 13 13
J27-J29
J1, J4, J6, 6-3 Connector (BW 1566) 12406 D 0 4
J9
BC 1361C Battery Charger 22576 A, B 2 2

Battery 85Ah 15004 B 0 4
Battery Circuit Breaker 20332 A, B 2 4
Battery 115Ah 15008 A 2 0
RCA 1240C Remote Control Assy 21342 E 1 0
RCA 1240D Remote Control Assy 21344 E 0 1
SKA 1229B Service Kit Assy 22945 A, B 1 1

EB 1349A Extension Board 18700 A, B 1 1
EB 1245A Coax cable Ext. Board 18662 A, B 1 1

23137-I6/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
6.1.3 Usable on code index
USABLE ON CODE INDEX

Usable On Description Park Air Sys-
Code tems Part. No.
A NORMARC 7031B GP CABINET 22935
B NORMARC 7032B GP CABINET 22936
C GCA 1585A GP 1-FRQ. CAB. ASS. 22279
D GCA 1585B GP 1-FRQ. HOT STB. CAB. ASS. 22280
E Tower Equipment -

23137-I6/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
6.2 Figures
Figure 6-1 NORMARC 7031B-7032B GP cabinet

23137-I6/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 6-2 NORMARC 7031B-7032B GP cabinet, Rear View

23137-I6/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 6-3 NORMARC 70xxB LLZ & GP cabinet, wall mount side

23137-I6/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7. Section 7 Installation and Initial Set-up
7.1 Mechanical Installation
The NORMARC 70XXB cabinet is constructed for mounting on a wall. For easy operation,
the keyboard/display section should be in eye/shoulder height (140-160cm). The RF con-
nectors may be mounted either on the cabinet top or the cabinet bottom. The free space
required around the cabinet is approximately one by one meter, see Figure 7-1
1.0m
0.9m
HBK594-2
Figure 7-1 NORMARC 70XXB required mounting space (top view)
7.1.1 Mounting Kit MK 1343A
If the wall is not able to carry the weight of the cabinet (see technical specifications), Park
Air Systems AS supplies a wall mounting kit, MK 1343A. This kit is dimensioned for stand-
ard 60 cm space between studs. For easy mounting, place the cabinet on the rest screws
(B) before entering the mounting screws (A). This is shown in the enlarged view in Figure
7-2

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 7-2 NORMARC 70XXB mounted on wall with MK 1343A

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
600
Hex. Screw 8x50 (B16)

Washer M8
808
606
1855 - 1890
919 - 954
Adjust. screw
HBK 1260-1
Figure 7-3 Wall mount dimersions (MK 1343A)
7.1.2 Moving RF Connectors
If desired the RF connectors may be moved from the cabinet top to the bottom or vice
versa, as illustrated in Figure 7-3. The back section (F) of the main cabinet has similar
hole patterns in the top and bottom flange. To move the connectors, follow these steps:
Remove all rubber grommets from the holes.
Disconnect all coaxial cables from the feed-through connectors.
Remove all feed-through connectors.
Move the metal bracket with anti-turn holes from the bottom to the top while disconnect-

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
ing the grounding strap from the lower end of the L-shaped vertical rail and reconnecting
at the top or vice versa.
Reinstall the feed-through connectors in the new position.
Reconnect the coaxial cables.
Reinsert the rubber grommets in all open holes.
Figure 7-4 Moving RF connectors

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2 Electrical Installation
This paragraph describes the external electrical connections of the NORMARC 7031B-
7032B main cabinet.
7.2.1 Connection Overview
The ILS main cabinet has three connector groups, illustrated in Figure 7-5
• The ILS RF signals to and from the antenna system are connected at the bottom of
the main cabinet. These connectors may be moved to the top, see Mechanical Instal-
lation.
• The power supply (supplies) and the backup battery are connected to the power
connector rail inside the cabinet back section.
• All other external connections are sited on the Connection Interface board CI 1210A
inside the cabinet back section.
POWER RAIL CONNECTIONS
POWER +27V
SUPPLY 0V
+27V
BATTERY
0V
CI 1210 CONNECTIONS
4 DC LOOPS
3 RS 232
1 REMOTE CONTROL
1 DME
2 TEMP SENSORS
1 AC LEVEL MEASUREMENT
3 DIFFERENTIAL ANALOG
CABLE FEEDTHROUGH 8 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT
1 IIC EXTENSION
RF CONNECTIONS
NF
IN DS
CL
COU/CSB
OUT
COU/SBO
HBK640-3
Figure 7-5 ILS main cabinet connection overview

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.2 Power and Battery
The power supply and the backup battery are connected to the power connector rail inside
the cabinet back section as shown in Figure 7-7. The cables used should have at least
4mm2 cross section. Circuit breakers shall be used between the ILS Cabinet and the bat-
teries.
Figure 7-6 Power and Battery connection Cold Standby

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 7-7 Power and Battery connection Hot Standby
A DC powered modem or other external equipment designed for 22V - 27V DC can be con-
nected to the fused terminal block marked Modem, (7011B, 13B, 31B and 33B) or to the
modem terminals on the BW 1566 (7012B, 14B, 32B and 34B). Maximum current con-
sumption should be 1 A.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.3 RF Inputs
The RF inputs are:

• Course Line - CL.
• Near Field Antenna - NF.
• Displacement Sensitivity - DS.
These are connected as shown in Figure 7-8 (front view).
HBK641-3 NF CL DS
Figure 7-8 RF input connections
7.2.4 RF Outputs
The RF outputs are connected as illustrated in Figure 7-9. The connections are:
All applications:
• COU SBO - COUrse Tx SideBand Only.
• COU CSB - COUrse Tx Carrier and SideBand.
SBO CSB
HBK642-3
Figure 7-9 RF output connections

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.5 Loop (Localizer only)
The DC loops are connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1210A in the cabinet
back section. Location and pin out are illustrated in Figure 7-10
• Ch X in* are the reference voltages from the main cabinet.
• Ch X out* are the return voltages from the antennas.
• GND is main cabinet ground.
Suitable female connectors are Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/6 or equivalent.
Figure 7-10 DC loop connections

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.6 Remote Control
The remote control is connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1210A as illustrated
in Figure 7-11. The connection of the remote control, remote slave panel and interlock
switch is done at the remote control site and covered in Section 7.2.13 - 7.2.16
• FSK_[P,N] is the modem line pair.
• GND is main cabinet ground.
For normal FSK modem operation the straps S9-11 on CI 1210A should be mounted.
Refer to 7.3.4 for configuration for RS-232 connection.
A suitable female connector is Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/4 or equivalent.
Figure 7-11 Remote control connection

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.7 PC and Modem
PC terminals and modems are connected to the standard pin out RS 232, 9 pins DSUB
connectors. The Remote 1 and Remote 2 connectors are located on the Connection Inter-
face board CI 1210A as illustrated in Figure 7-12. The Local connector is located on the
front of the cabinet.
Recommended connections are:

• LOCAL - the PC located at the ILS main cabinet site.
• REMOTE 1 - the PC located at the airport technical maintenance site.
• REMOTE 2 - distant PC terminals connected directly or through a modem.
Figure 7-12 PC and modem connections
7.2.8 DME (Does not apply to GP Systems)

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.9 Analog Inputs
7.2.9.1 General Description
The analog inputs are connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1210A as illustrated
in Figure 7-13
The inputs are:

• ANALOG CH.1-3 - three single ended DC analog inputs.
Maximum voltage: ±15V

Input impedance: 10kOhms.
• TINDOOR, TOUTDOOR - temperature measurement inputs with interface to an LM35
temperature sensor.
Maximum voltage: ±15V.
• AC LEVEL - AC level measurement input. Intended for use with a battery eliminator
(i.e. 220/9VAC) to monitor the mains voltage.
Maximum voltage: 24Vpp.
Figure 7-13 Analog input connections

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.9.2 Analog user inputs (CH.1-CH.3) details
Connectors: ANALOG CH.1, 2 and 3 on CI 1210A.
Input signal on pin 1, GND on pin 2 and 4.
Max input voltage relative to GND is ±15 V (zener diodes will clamp the signal if this limit
is exceeded).
Theoretically, full-scale positive is achieved by applying approx. +32 V, this would give a
reading = 2047 when scale=1 and offset=0. Fullscale negative approx.: -32 V (gives a
reading of -2048 when scale=1 and offset=0).
However, the full resolution of the A/D converter cannot be utilized in single ended mode
since the maximum input voltage relative to GND is ±15V, limiting the readings to approx.
±1000.
Read-out value = Ax + B
where
A is the “scale” value configured in the RMM “Analog user parameter” setup window,
B is the “offset” value configured in the RMM “Analog user parameter” setup window,
x is the 12 bit binary representation of the input voltage.
Figure 7-14 Typical circuit diagram

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.10 Digital Inputs and Outputs
Eight bidirectional digital channels (numbered 0-7) are located on the Connection Inter-
face board CI 1210A as illustrated in Figure 7-15
Logic levels: TTL.
Input impedance: 4.7kOhms.
Output impedance: Open collector with 4.7kOhms pull-up resistor.
Note about using these channels as inputs on CI 1210A part rev. 3 or earlier:
To drive a channel configured as an input the user equipment must be able to source
approx. 10 mA at +5 V for the high logic level. This can be sourced from the +27V by using a
2.7 kOhms resistor. There is no need to pull down for the low logic level.
Figure 7-15 Digital input/output connections

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Digital inputs and outputs - CI 1210A revision 4 or later.
Figure 7-16 Equivalent circuit diagrams

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.11 Battery Warning
Two inputs for main power supply failure (backup battery active) are sited on the
CI 1210A connection interface board as illustrated in Figure 7-17
Logic levels: Normally high 5V or 0V =battery warning.
Figure 7-17 Battery warning connections

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.12 IIC extension
The IIC extension is intended for use with future equipment connected to the ILS equip-
ment. The IIC SDA and IIC SCL signals are protected with automatic fuses.
Figure 7-18 IIC extension

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.13 Remote control connections
The remote control is connected to the corresponding ILS by connecting the REMOTE
CONTROL connector on Connection Interface CI 1210 to P9 on Motherboard MB 1346, as
shown in Figure 7-19.
Suitable female connectors are Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/4 or equivalent. 600 Ohms cable
should be used.
REMOTE NORMARC
CONTROL P9 MB1346
1 - GND 1 - TXOFF J2 P9 P3
J1
2 - FSK_P 2 - ALARM TXOFF
3 - FSK_N 3 - LINE_A ALARM

C B A
1
4 - GND 4 - LINE_B LINE A
LINE B
P10 5
RX A
CI1210 RX B
on
10
TX A
corresponding TX B
SLAVE RS485
ILS P8
15
or ALT.LINK
INTERLOCK
SLAVE
DIRECT
CI 1376 P6
AUX IN/OUT 20
on
corresponding P7 25
Marker Beacon
P5 OPTO OUT P4
GND GND 30
1-ALARM (C)
2-ALARM (E)
5V 3-NORM (C) 5V
4-NORM (E)
5-WARN (C) 24V
24V
6-WARN (E)
7-STBAL (C)
V_DIM V_DIM
8-STBAL (E)
POWER OUT POWER IN
HBK772-2
Figure 7-19 Remote control to ILS connection

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
The power supply to the remote control is connected according to Figure 7-20. The power
supply is connected to P2 pin 1 and 3 on the MB 1347 - power supply motherboard.
Optional standby power / battery can be connected to P2 pin 2 and 4. Output connector
P3 on MB 1347 is connected to input connector P4 on MB 1346 - remote control mother-
board. Several MB 1346's are serial linked by connecting P5 on one board to P4 on the
next.
NORMARC NORMARC
MB1346 MB1346
J2 P9 P3 J2 P3
P9
J1 J1 J1
TXOFF TXOFF
NORMARC
MB1347
ALA RM ALA RM
C B A C B A B A
1 1 1
LINE A LINE A
LINE B LINE B
D1
P10 5 P10 5 F1 5
RX A RX A
RX B RX B
10 10 10
TX A TX A
TX B TX B
P2
From
SLA VE RS 485
15
SLA VE RS 485
15
GND
15
24VDC
P8 P8
GND power
supply
INTERLOCK
ALT.LIN K SLA VE ALT.LINK
INTER LOCK
SLA VE 24V
DIRE CT DIR ECT
AU X IN/OUT 20 AU X IN/OU T 20 BAT 20
P6 P6
POW ER IN
S1
From
P7 25 P7 25 25
Optional
V_DIM=24V
24VDC
P5 OPTO OUT P4 P5 OPTO OUT P4
P3
Battery
GND 1-ALARM (C) GND 30
GND 1-A LARM (C) GND 30 GND 30
2-ALARM (E) 2-A LARM (E)
5V 3-N ORM (C) 5V 5V 3-N ORM (C) 5V 5V

4-N ORM (E) 4-N ORM (E)
24V
5-W ARN (C)
6-W ARN (E)
24V 24V 5-W ARN (C)
24V 24V
6-W ARN (E)
7-STBAL (C) 7-S TB AL (C)
V_DIM 8-STBAL (E) V_DIM V_DIM 8-S TB AL (E)
V_DIM V_DIM
POWER OUT POWER IN PO WER OUT PO WER IN POWER OUT
HBK773-3
Figure 7-20 Remote control power supply connections

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.14 Automatic shutdown of GP
If required, the GP can be configured to shut down automatically when the LLZ is off. Con-
nect a wire from P9 ALARM on the Motherboard MB 1346A that belongs to the LLZ to P9
TXOFF on the MB 1346A that belongs to the GP. Refer to Figure 7-21.
HBK1100-1 GP LLZ
NORMARC NORMARC
MB1346 MB1346
J2 P9 P3 J2 P9 P3
J1 J1
TXOFF TXOFF
ALARM ALARM
C B A C B A
1 1
LINE A LINE A
LINE B LINE B
P10 5 P10 5
10 10
SLAVE RS485 SLAVE RS485

15 15
P8 P8
INTERLOCK INTERLOCK
ALT.LINK SLAVE ALT.LINK SLAVE
DIRECT DIRECT
AUX IN/OUT 20 AUX IN/OUT 20
P6 P6
P7 25 P7 25
P5 OPTO OUT P4 P5 OPTO OUT P4

30
GND 1-ALARM (C) GND GND 1-ALARM (C) GND 30
2-ALARM (E) 2-ALARM (E)
5V 3-NORM (C) 5V 5V 3-NORM (C) 5V
4-NORM (E) 4-NORM (E)
5-WARN (C)
24V 6-WARN (E)
24V 24V
5-WARN (C)
24V
6-WARN (E)
7-STBAL (C) 7-STBAL (C)
V_DIM 8-STBAL (E) V_DIM V_DIM 8-STBAL (E) V_DIM
POWER OUT POWER IN POWER OUT POWER IN
Figure 7-21 Automatic GP shutdown connection

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.15 Remote slave connection
The remote slave panel SF 1344 is connected to the corresponding remote control's moth-
erboard by connecting P3 on MB 1346 to P1 on SF 1344. P10 on MB 1346 is not used. See
Figure 7-22.
Suitable connectors are standard 25 pins female DSUB (Harting 0967 025 0442 and 0967
225 4704 or equivalent), connected by a 10 wire 1:1 cable.
NORMARC
MB1346
J2 P9 P3
J1
TXOFF
ALARM
C B A
1
LINE A
LINE B
P10 5
To P1
RX A
1:1 on
RX B
10
SF1344
TX A
TX B
SLAVE RS485
15
P8
INTERLOCK
ALT.LINK SLAVE
DIRECT
AUX IN/OUT 20
Bold: Normally used
P6
Outputs:
1, 7, 13 - GND
P7 25 2 - Alarm
3 - Warning
4 - Normal
P5 OPTO OUT P4 13 25 5 - STB Alarm
GND 30
6 - STB Warn
GND 1-ALARM (C)
2-ALARM (E)
8 - STB Normal
5V 3-NORM (C) 5V 9 - RMM Access
4-NORM (E) 10 - Param. Warn
5-WARN (C)
24V 24V 11 - Disagree warn
6-WARN (E)
7-STBAL (C)
12 - Battery warn (Mains lost)
V_DIM V_DIM
8-STBAL (E) 14 - Ident Warn
POWER OUT POWER IN 15, 16 - 24V DC
17 - Mainenance warning
18 - STB on Air
24 -Vdim (24V)
1 14 25 - Buzzer
Inputs:
19 - ON/OFF
20 - Changeover
21 - Silence
22 - Access grant
23 - Interlock
HBK 774-2
Figure 7-22 Remote slave connection

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.16 Interlock switch connection
The interlock switch is either connected to P8 on MB 1346 (remote control motherboard)

or to P2 on SF 1344 (remote slave panel), see Figure 7-23.
INTERLOCK MB1346 / P8
SWITCH OR
SF1344 / P2
RWYA RWYB
1 INTERLOCK
2 GND
5 4 2 1
1 2
LLZ runway A 2 1 LLZ runway B
1 2
GP runway A 2 1 GP runway B
HBK775-2
Figure 7-23 Interlock switch connection
Note 1:
When MB 1346A is used with Remote Control Assembly RCA 1240C or D and Interlock function
is not used (connected), a jumper plug must be installed in P8.
Note 2:
When the Interlock switch is used, the jumper plug normally installed in MB 1346-P8 must be
removed.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.17 Remote Control Auxiliary Channels
The Remote Control system has 3 uncommitted digital signals in each direction. These can
be used to transmit additional status and control signals between the remote control and
equipment rack. Please note that if the signals are connected to external equipment such
as other navaids or intrusion alarms, relays or optocouplers shall be used to provide a gal-
vanic barrier. For a number of purposes the NORMARC SK 1470 kit is suitable.
The signals are available on MB 1575, P15 in the ILS rack, and on MB 1346, P6 in the
remote control.
Connections from the ILS rack to the Remote Control:
Input in ILS rack, MB 1575, P15 Output in Remote Control, MB 1346, P6

Pin no. Signal name Pin no. Signal name
1 AUX_RI_IN0 1 AUX_RC_OUT0
10 GND 4, 9, 10 GND
Connections from the Remote Control to the ILS rack:
Input in Remote Control, MB 1346, P6 Output in ILS rack, MB 1575, P15

Pin no. Signal name Pin no. Signal name
5 AUX_RC_IN0 5 AUX_RI_OUT0
4, 9, 10 GND 10 GND
Signal interfaces:
All inputs are TTL level with pull-up to 5VDC. Outputs are TTL buffers with a drive capabil-
ity of 20mA maximum. Care must be taken to avoid overloading the outputs. This may
occur if the outputs are connected directly to external equipment without a galvanic bar-
rier.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 7-24 Connector location, MB 1346 (Remote Control)

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 7-25 Connector Location, MB 1575 (ILS Rack)

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 7-26 Typical circuit diagram, Remote Control End
Figure 7-27 Typical circuit diagram, ILS Rack End

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.2.18 Remote Control optocoupler outputs
The remote control has optocoupler outputs for the following signals:
• Normal
• Warning
• Alarm
• Standby Alarm
The optocoupler outputs are available on MB 1346, P7.
Connector layout:
Pin no. Signal

1 Alarm – Collector (+)
2 Alarm – Emitter (-)
3 Normal – Collector (+)
4 Normal – Emitter (-)
5 Warning – Collector (+)
6 Warning – Emitter (-)
7 Standby Alarm – Collector (+)
8 Standby Alarm – Emitter (-)
The optocouplers are saturated for true signals.
Example: When Alarm is indicated, The Alarm optocoupler is saturated, giving a low
impedance connection between pin 1 and 2.
Maximum voltage Vce: 50V dc
Maximum current I max: 20mA
Figure 7-28 Typical Remote Control Optocoupler output

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.3 Tests and Adjustments
7.3.1 Configuration Settings
Follow this procedure to set the configurations in the ILS according to the desired system
configuration.
7.3.2 ILS Configuration
Set the correct configuration for this ILS according to this table. The strap platforms U6
and U13 for configuration of the Station Control and the Remote Control Interface are
located on Transmitter Control Assembly TCA 1218 (Figure 7-29).
1 Strap IN NOT interlock

Strap OUT Interlock
2 Strap IN NOT hot standby
Strap OUT Hot standby
3 Strap IN 2 frequency ILS
Strap OUT 1 frequency ILS
4 Strap IN 1 of 2 voting
Strap OUT 2 of 2 voting (default)
5 Strap IN Lost contact with remote control will NOT turn off transmitters.
Strap OUT Lost contact with remote control will turn off transmitters. (default). Refer to Table 7-
2 for setting the shutdown delay.
6 Strap IN WRITE PROTECT switch in horizontal position generate service condition. (default)
Strap OUT WRITE PROTECT switch in horizontal position does not generate service condition.
7 Strap IN ACCESS grant switch on remote control must be in access grant position in order to
obtain access level 2 or 3 from the RMM system. (default)
Strap OUT ACCESS grant switch on remote control is overridden.
8 Strap IN Tells the RMS that this is a GP ILS.
Strap OUT Tells the RMS that this is a LLZ ILS.
9 Strap IN Spare, Not in use.
Strap OUT Spare, Not in use.
10 Strap IN See description below.
Strap OUT DEFAULT.
Table 7-1 Setting ILS configuration platform U6
Strap 10 is used for resetting the master Password in case this has been lost. The proce-
dure is as follows:
• Power rack off.
• Insert a temporary link for strap 10 on the configuration-block U6 on the TCA 1218
board.
• Reinsert TCA 1218.
• Power rack on.
• Wait till you see the message “master password reset” on the RMS LCD panel.
• Power rack off and remove strap 10.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
• The master passwords has now been set to:
k5opm7e [space] xcw6qop [space] o9i8jnw

• Log in as MASTER from the PC using the three passwords above
• Change the Master passwords to the wanted ones (default: master1 master2
master3)
The action following a lost contact with Remote Control is configurable with U6 and U13 in
combination according to Table 7-2 (applies from revision 3 of the TCA 1218 board).
Action U6 strap 5 U13 strap 5

No shutdown IN Don’t care
2 sec. delayed shutdown (default) OUT OUT
30 sec. delayed shutdown OUT IN
Table 7-2 Setting RC link shutdown delay
Normally a changeover does not influence the Main/Standby transmitter selection. How-
ever by setting straps according to Table 7-3, a Changeover from Remote Control will in
addition to changing transmitter-on-air also redefine the main and Standby transmitters
(similar to pressing Main Select (TX1/TX2) and Changeover on Local Control Panel)
(applies from revision 3 of the TCA 1218 board).
Action U13 strap 1 U13 strap 2 U13 strap 4

Normal operation (default) OUT OUT OUT
Main select at changeover IN IN IN
Table 7-3 Setting RC Main select at changeover
During Service mode of operation, transmitting ILS equipment is normally not shown as a
green Normal LED on the Remote Control panel, only the red Alarm LED will be lit. A spe-
cial Service Mode for the Remote Control display has been implemented for interfacing
with customized Remote Control and Monitoring Systems. In this configuration the Alarm,
Warning and Normal LED will be showing system status as during normal operation and
the Remote Control panel will indicate that the ILS equipment is in Service mode by a lit
Access LED, often relabelled as SERVICE instead of ACCESS. This mode is configured as
shown in Table 7-4 (applies from revision 4 of the TCA 1218 board).
Action U13 strap 3

Normal Service mode indication (by Alarm LED) OUT
(Default)
Service Mode indicated by Access IN
Table 7-4 Setting RC indication in Service Mode

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
10
9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
U13 U6 HBK592-3
Figure 7-29 Transmitter Control strap platforms
7.3.3 Remote Ports Access Level Configuration
The allowed access levels on REMOTE ports 1 and 2 on the RMS can be configured by set-
ting jumpers S1-S4 on the Transmitter Control Assembly TCA1218A (Figure 7-29) accord-
ing to Table 7-5.
Jumper in means that access level is allowed.
Jumper out means that access level is denied.
PORT ACC. LEVEL 2 ACC. LEVEL 3

Remote 1 Strap S1 Strap S2
Remote 2 Strap S3 Strap S4
Table 7-5 Access level strap settings. Warning Configuration
Use the RMM Program to configure which warnings shall cause system warning, i.e. illumi-
nate the RC main warning lamp. The main warning lamp is the warning indication given on
the Slave Panel for the Air Traffic Controllers.
7.3.4 Remote Control Interface (CI 1210)
The transmission medium (telephone line (FSK modem) or RS 232) to the Remote Control
can be selected by plugs and link straps S9 - S14 on the Connection Interface CI 1210 if
the equipment is equipped with the RS-232 cable.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Straps in Function Connector used

S9, S10, S11 Telephone line (FSK modem) CI 1210, P29
S12, S13, S14 RS-232 with CD CI 1210, P31
S12, S13, S18 RS-232 without CD CI1210, P31
Table 7-6 Remote Control Setup
NOTE: For external modem, use RS-232 with CD (Carrier Detect). If CD is not supported by the RS-
232 medium, use RS-232 without CD.
7.3.5 Remote Control configuration
The Aural Alarm / Warning functions and transmission medium (telephone line or RS 232)
in the Remote Control can be selected by link straps: The strap links S6 to S12 will give
Aural Warning for the following warning parameters when connected:
Strap Warning Parameter

S6 Standby Alarm (Hot Standby racks only)
S7 Parameter Warning
S8 Ident Warning
S9 Battery Warning
S10 Standby on Air
S11 Monitor Disagree Warning
S12 Maintenance Warning
Table 7-7 Aural warning configuration
Strap Function
S1 in Silence on Remote Control resets Remote Control buzzer only
S1 out Silence on Remote Control resets both Remote Control and Slave Panel buzzer
S5 in Silence on Slave Panel resets Slave Panel buzzer only
S5 out Silence on Slave Panel resets both Remote Control and Slave Panel buzzer
Table 7-8 Warning reset (Silence)
Strap Function
S4 in Buzzer connected
S4 out Buzzer disconnected
Table 7-9 Buzzer
S2 pins connected S3 pins connected Function Input used on MB 1346A

1-2 1-2 Telephone line P9 Line A and Line B
3-4 3-4 RS 232 J2 Alt. link
5-6 5-6 TTL logic Not supported
Table 7-10 Telephone Line / RS 232 / TTL logic

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.4 Transmitter Setup
Test Equipment required:

• NORMARC 3710 Field Test Set (with 20 dB attenuator)
• BNC Test Cable
Carry out the alignment steps in the order outlined below:
7.4.2 RF output level
7.4.3 LF phase check
7.4.4 SDM adjustment
7.4.5 DDM adjustment
7.4.6 CSB/SBO phase adjustment
7.4.7 Course Sector adjustment
7.4.8 Ident Morse code
7.4.9 Ident modulation adjustment
7.4.10 Flight Check value setting
7.4.1 Transmitter setup
The following sub paragraphs describe the System alignments. Two options are given for
each adjustment. The first "initial installation" is the one to be carried out during installa-
tion of a new ILS. The second one "Replacement" is to be carried out if an LPA/GPA mod-
ule has been replaced.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.4.2 RF output level
Open Transmitter settings window. Select Signal adj. tab.
Select the parameter for the transmitter to be adjusted.
Figure 7-30 RF output level
Open Maintenance measurements window.
Observe the CSB forward power for the

transmitter.
Adjust COU (CLR) RF until the correct out-

put power is achieved.
7.4.2.1 Replacement
The CSB power should normally be set to

the nominal value.
LLZ Course 20W nominal

5-25W range
LLZ Clearance 20W nominal
5-25W range
GP Course 6W nominal
3-8W range
GP Clearance 0,6 nominal
0.1-1W range
Table 7-11 Normal operating power level
Figure 7-31 Maintenance Measurements

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.4.3 LF Phase Check

DEMODULATION CSB: NORMAL DEMODULATION CSB 10° LF PHASE ERROR
Figure 7-32 LF phase CSB illustration
Connect oscilloscope channel A to the BNC test connector labelled CSB located on LPA/
GPA Course 1 (2). (LPA CLR1(2))
Set oscilloscope input mode to DC.
Adjust con 90 Hz COU phase in the RMM program (Transmitter settingd/signal adj.)
observing oscilloscope channel A until the waveform equals left hand graph in Figure 7-32.
A significant indication of correct LF phase is that the pair of the intermediate peaks are
equal in amplitude.
For two- frequency LLZ, repeat for CLR 90 Hz phase.
7.4.4 SDM adjustment
Figure 7-33 SDM Adjustment

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.4.4.1 Initial installation
Connect a calibrated DDM-meter / PIR to the relevant test BNC jack on the ventilation
cover.
Observe the measured SDM.
Adjust COU (CLR) SDM until the correct SDM measurement is achieved.
7.4.4.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe CL (CLR) SDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the SDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) SDM of the new transmitter until the SDM readings are within +/- 0.02%SDM of the
other transmitter.
7.4.5 DDM adjustment
Figure 7-34 DDM Adjustment
Connect a calibrated DDM-meter / PIR to the relevant test BNC jack on the ventilation
cover.
Observe the measured DDM.
Adjust COU (CLR) DDM until the correct DDM measurement is achieved.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.4.5.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe CL (CLR) DDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the SDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) DDM of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the
other transmitter.
7.4.6 CSB / SBO phase adjustment
The SBO phase can be adjusted via two different windows.

1. Open Transmitter settings window. Select Signal adj. tab.
or
2. Open Flight Check window
The first is preferred for LLZ while the second must be used for GP since phasing of GP
requires inserting of 90 degree stub.
Figure 7-35 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (Transmitter settings)

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
2. Observe
3. Adjust
1. Insert 90
deg. stub
Figure 7-36 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (flight check)
During antenna system adjustments the CSB/SBO phase will be adjusted. Please refer to
the antenna systems handbooks for detailed procedure.
Select the first option mentioned above for LLZ and the second option for GP.
7.4.6.2 Replacement
LLZ:
Connect the DDM-meter / PIR to the test connector on the ADU.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the SBO
phase of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the other
transmitter.
GP:
Connect the DDM-meter / PIR to the monitor return cable lower antenna (M1).
Open Fligh Check window, insert 90 degree stub or, alternatively, connect the 90 degree
cable stub in the SBO cable.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the SBO
phase of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the other
transmitter.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.4.7 Course Sector adjustment
Figure 7-37 Course Sector Adjustment
During antenna system adjustments the Course Sector will be adjusted. Please refer to
the antenna systems handbooks for detailed procedure.
Adjust COU (CLR) SBO level until the correct Course Sector is achieved.
7.4.7.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe DS DDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) SBO level of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the
other transmitter.
7.4.8 Ident Morse code
Check the Morse code value. If it is not correct, push the Edit button and type in the cor-
rect code.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.4.9 Ident modulation adjustment
Adjust Tx1 first with Tx1 to air, repeat for Tx2.
Connect the Field Test Set to the CSB COU (CLR) test connector on the ventilation cover
through a 20 or 30 dB attenuator.
Open Transmitter settings window. Select Modulation tab. Set the Morse signal to Cont.
(continuous).
Select Signal adj. tab. Select COU 1020Hz level (CLR 1020Hz level). Push Edit and adjust
the modulation level
On the Field Test Set read IDENT MOD. The nominal reading should be 10% MOD, alterna-
tively the same value as previous recording. (If voice modulation is applied the Ident
modulation shall be 5% modulation depth.)
7.4.10 Flight Check value setting
The values in the Flight Check window will normally be set during the Commissioning
flights to give signal values that correspond to the alarm limits.
To set the signal values, open the Flight Check window, select the transmitter on air
(Tx1|Tx2) and Alarm limit check. Set values as required for alarm limit checks.
Figure 7-38 Flight Check value setting

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.5 Antenna System Adjustments
After the transmitters has been aligned correctly the antenna system must be aligned.
This includes mechanical adjustments of the Antenna System, electrical adjustments
(phasing) and adjustments of the ADU and MCU.
For details, refer to the adjustment procedure for each antenna system.
7.6 Monitor Alignment
Refer to paragraph 7.7 for monitor limits.
Test Equipment required:

• Oscilloscope, general purpose
• NORMARC 3710 Field Test Set (with 20 dB attenuator)
• BNC Test Cable
• Digital Voltmeter, 4 digits, DC
7.6.1 General
Description is given only for the DS channels. R338++ means that the other channels has
numbers R1338, R2338 and R3338 for CL, CLR and NF channels.
Before any monitor adjustments are attempted, the following procedures shall be com-
pleted:
Transmitter Setup
Network alignments
It is imperative for the result that the signals from the Monitor Combining Network (MCU)
are correct. Check these signals with the NORMARC 3710, Field Test Set,
These signals are used for aligning the monitors.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.6.2 RF Input Level Adjustment.
Mount the Monitor Frontend MF 12xx on an extender card.
Turn on the transmitters.
Set the potentiometer R338++ in middle position. See Figure 7-39.
HBK776-2
Figure 7-39 Adjustment points on Monitor Frontend MF12xx
Adjust the jumper settings in P2++ and potentiometer R338++ until the voltage is 240mV
at TP23++.
HBK777-2
Figure 7-40 Alternative jumper settings of P2++
Turn off the equipment and remove the extender card. Set the Monitor Frontend MF 12xx
in its correct position. Turn on the transmitters.
Adjust the RF level potentiometer on the front of Monitor Frontend MF 12xx until the mon-
itor gives a RF level reading of 3.0V.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.6.3 AGC Time Adjustment
Turn on the transmitters.
Make a note of the AGC voltages on TP 1,2,3 and 4 on MF 12xx.
Turn off the transmitters.
Adjust the AGC TIM potentiometer on the front of Monitor Frontend MF 12xx until the AGC
voltage (TP1,2,3 or 4) is the same as with a nominal RF input.
Do this for all four monitor channels on all of the Monitor Frontend MF 12xx modules in the
system.
This ensures fast response from the monitors.
7.6.4 SDM Adjustment
Adjust the SDM potentiometer on the front of Monitor Frontend MF 12xx until the monitors
reads 40.0% (LZZ)/80.0% (GP)SDM +/- 0.1%SDM.
7.6.5 DDM Adjustment
Measure and note down the DDM values from the MCU and NF antenna with help of the
Field Test Set.
Set the Nominal values for each channel to the measured values with help of the RMM
Program.
7.7 Factory Default Configuration Settings
7.7.1 Cat I monitor LIMIT configuration
Factory default alarm, warning-limits and nominal values are shown in Table 7-12.
DDM values are in % DDM (which is the default DDM measurement unit in the RMM soft-
ware).
Limit values are relative to the configured nominal value. The nominal values for DDM
measurements can be configured by the user. Other nominal values can not be modified
by the user.
Monitor 1 and monitor 2 are always configured equally and according to Table 7-12. The
standby monitor are also configured according to this table, but with a few exceptions, see
the notes following the table.
Note that for the CL, DS, NF, CLR, and FFM channels the alarm limits are fine-tuned during
commissioning and flight tests to match each site installation.
For information on using the RMM software to set the monitor limits, see Appendix D.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
LLZ GP
Channel Signal Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H
CL DDM 0.0 % -1.5/1.5 75 % 0.0 % -3.73/3.73 75 %
CL SDM 40 % -4/4 75 % 80 % -5/5 75 %
CL RF 3.0 V 1f: -1/1.5 75 % 3.0 V 1f: -1/1.5 75 %
2f: -0.35/0.47 2f: -0.36/0.43
NF DDM 0.0 % -1.5/1.5 75 % 0.0 % -5.25/5.25 75 %
NF SDM 40 % -20/20 75 % 80 % -20/20 75 %
NF RF 3.0 V -1.5/1.5 75 % 3.0 V -1.7/1.7 75 %
DS DDM 15.5 % -2.5/2.5 75 % 17.5 % -4.3/4.3 75 %
DS SDM 40 % -20/20 75 % 80 % -20/20 75 %
DS RF 3.0 V -1.5/1.5 75 % 3.0 V -1.7/1.7 75 %
CLR DDM 0.0 % 1f: Off/Off 1f: 100 % 0.0 % 1f: Off/Off 1f: 100 %
2f: -4.0/4.0 2f: 75 % 2f: -5.25/5.25 2f: 75 %
CLR SDM 40 % 1f: Off/Off 1f: 100 % 80 % 1f: Off/Off 1f: 100 %
2f: -4.0/4.0 2f: 75 % 2f: -5/5 2f: 75 %
CLR RF 3.0 V 1f: Off/Off 1f: 100 % 3.0 V 1f: Off/Off 1f: 100 %
2f:-0.37/0.44 2f: 75 % 2f: -0.36/0.43 2f: 75%
DF 10 kHz 1f: Off/Off 1f: 100 % 15 kHz 1f: Off/Off 1f: 100 %
2f: -4/4 2f: 75 % 2f: -4.5/4.5 2f: 75 %
CLR ID ACT 0.0 % Off/Off 1f: -69/69 0.0 % Off/Off -69/69
2f: 2.5/20
CLR ID MOD 0.0 % Off/Off 100 % 0.0 % Off/Off 100 %
CL ID ACT 0.0 % Off/Off 2.5/20 0.0 % Off/Off -69/69

CL ID MOD 0.0 % Off/Off 100 % 0.0 % Off/Off 100 %
DC-L0 0 2/42 100 % 0 Off/Off 100 %
LLZ GP
Channel Signal Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H
DC-L1 0 2/42 100 % 0 Off/Off 100 %
DC-L2 0 2/42 100 % 0 Off/Off 100 %
DC-L3 0 2/42 100 % 0 Off/Off 100 %
Self test DDM 0.0 % -1.4/4.0 100 % 0.0 % -2.5/Off 100 %
Self test SDM 40 % -8/Off 100 % 40 % 25/Off 100 %
Self test RF 3.0 V -1.2/1.8 100 % 3.0 V -1/Off 100 %
FFM ChA DDM 0.0 % -1.5/1.5 75 % 0.0 % -3.7/3.7 75 %

FFM ChA SDM 40 % -4/4 75 % 80 % -5/5 75 %
FFM ChA RF 0.0 V 20/80 30/70 0.0 V 20/80 30/70
FFM ChB DDM 0.0 % -1.5/1.5 75 % 0.0 % Off/Off 100 %
FFM ChB SDM 40 % -4/4 75 % 80 % Off/Off 100 %
FFM ChB RF 0.0 V 20/80 30/70 0.0 V Off/Off -100/100
FFM EXE AL 0 0/200 -2047/2047 0 0/200 -2047/2047
CL VOICE 0.0 Off/Off 150/204 0.0 Off/Off -150/204
DETECT
Table 7-12 CAT I alarm and warning limits

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
NOTES:
1. Unused DC loop channels: Set monitor alarm limits OFF and warning limits to 100%.
2. Unused Far Field Monitor (FFM) channels: Set monitor alarm limits to OFF and warning limits
to 100% (RF warning to ±100).
3. Unused VOICE channels: Set alarm limits to OFF and warning limits to ±204.
4. Standby monitor: Always disable alarms and warnings on the following channels: Near Field,
DC-loop, Far Field Monitor, and Voice.
7.7.2 Description of the FFM EXE AL limits
The FFM EXE AL (Far Field Monitor Executive Alarm) parameter is used to implement exec-
utive changeover/shutdown on FFM alarms. This measurement is zero when no alarms
exists on the FFM DDM/SDM/RF parameters. When an alarm has lasted for the time con-
figured in the FFM delay value, this measurement will be set to the value 101.
By setting the FFM EXE AL high alarm limit to 100, the TX Control will initiate an (execu-
tive) changeover or shutdown on FFM parameter alarms. (Actually, any high alarm limit
between 1 and 100 would work, but 100 is recommended as the default if executive FFM
alarms is desired.)
For non-executive FFM alarms, set the FFM EXE AL high alarm limit to a value higher than
101 (200 is recommended as the default).
7.7.3 Description of the CL IDENT and CLR IDENT limits
The CL ID ACT and CLR ID ACT parameters are the absolute value of the difference
between two consecutive 1020 Hz modulation measurements taken on the Course Line
and Clearance channels. This means that these parameters will have the value 0 when, for
example, the ident-keyer stops sending Morse code or if the 1020 Hz tone is continuously
on (at approximately the same level). A positive non-zero value is therefore an indication
of ident. modulation activity.
The recommended low warning limit is 2.5. The ident. modulation levels then needs to be
large enough to periodically produce a CL or CLR ID ACT measurement that is greater
than this low limit to reset the ID ACT delay counter. All measurements that is greater
than this minimum value should be accepted, the upper warning limit is therefore set to a
large value (20 is the recommended value).
If executive changeover/shutdown is desired on alarms on the CL or CLR IDENT parame-

ters, the warning limits recommended above should be used, instead of OFF, on the alarm
limits.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.7.4 Cat II monitor LIMIT configuration
For Cat II equipment the monitor limits are configured as for Cat I (see Table 7-12), with
the exceptions shown in Table 7-13. (Only the LLZ limits are different.)
LLZ GP
Channel Signal Nom Ala H/L Wa H/L Nom Ala Warn
CL DDM 0.0 % -1.1/1.1 75 % 0.0 % -3.73/3.73 75 %
NF DDM 0.0 % -1.1/1.1 75 % 0.0 % -5.25/5.25 75 %
Table 7-13 Alarm and warning limits for Cat II equipment
7.7.5 Cat III monitor LIMIT configuration
For Cat III equipment the monitor limits are configured as for Cat I (see Table 7-12), with
the exceptions shown in Table 7-14. (Only the LLZ limits are different.
LLZ GP
Channel Signal Nom Ala H/L Wa H/L Nom Ala Warn
CL DDM 0.0 % -0.9/0.9 75 % 0.0 % -3.73/3.73 75 %
NF DDM 0.0 % -0.9/0.9 75 % 0.0 % -5.25/5.25 75 %
Table 7-14 Alarm and warning limits for Cat III equipment

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.7.6 Executive Monitor delay configuration
The factory default delay configuration for Cat I and II/III (values compliant with ICAO
Annex 10) are shown in Table 7-15.
Note: that Annex 10 specifies the total changeover + shutdown delay after an alarm. The delay val-
ues used in the NORMARC 7000 RMM software are the time delay between the detection of an
alarm and the resulting changeover or shutdown. When a changeover takes place the delay
counters are reset. The values entered in the RMM software are therefore set to the Annex 10
value divided by two.
The NF delay is used for alarms on the NF DDM, SDM and RF parameters. The IDENT delay
is used on the CL/CLR IDENT, MORSE and VOICE parameters. The FFM delay is used on all
FFM parameters including FFM EXE AL. The GEN delay is used on all remaining parame-
ters.
See Appendix D for information on delay configuration using the RMM software.
LLZ GP
Channel Cat I Cat II/III Cat I Cat II/III
GEN 5s 1s 3s 1s
NF 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
IDENT 20 s 20 s N/A N/A
FFM 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s
Table 7-15 Factory default delay values
7.7.7 Maintenance parameter configuration
This following sub-sections describes the maintenance measurements collected by the

RMS for diagnostic purposes. Default warning limits is also defined for each measurement
type.
The warning limit for digital measurement point, are set to the “normal” state of the
measurement point. For example, for a measurement point that is normally “HIGH”, the
warning limit is set to “HIGH”.
For analog measurement points the limits are specified as “low limit”/”high limit”.
See Appendix D for information on using the RMM software to set these limits.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.7.7.1 Oscillator 1 and 2 (OS 1221)
Measurement Warn. limit. Description

COU OUTPUT LEVEL HIGH Detects low output level from the board. May cause
low radiated power.
COU TUNEVOLT HIGH Voltage Controlled Oscillator parameter drift.
COU SYNTH LOCK HIGH The phase locked loop has been out of lock. (May
be reset by turning the TX off/on.)
COU LOCK DETECT HIGH Output frequency is unstable.
CLR OUTPUT LEVEL HIGH Detects low output level from the board. May cause
low radiated power.
CLR TUNEVOLT OK HIGH Voltage controlled oscillator parameter drift.
CLR SYNTH LOCK HIGH The phase locked loop has been out of lock. (May
be reset by turning the TX off/on.)
CLR LOCK DETECT HIGH Output frequency is stable/not stable.
7.7.7.2 LF generator 1 and 2 (LF 1576)
Measurement Warn. limit Description

-15 V 0/0 (Normally low) -15 V supply voltage status.
+15 V 1/1 (Normally high) +15 V supply voltage status.
+2.5 V 0/0 (Normally low) +2.5 V supply voltage status.
+3.5 V 0/0 (Normally low) +3.5 V supply voltage status.
Watchdog 0/0 (Normally low) Watchdog status. This signal is set to 1 if the watch-
dog has reset the DSP.
DSP execution 1/1 (Normally high) DSP software execution status. This signal is set to
0 if the DSP does not access the FPGA.
DSP memory check 0/0 (Normally low) DSP memory status. This signal is set to 1 by the
DSP software if it detects any failure in the external
flash program memory or the internal RAM.
EEPROM parity 0/0 (Normally low) Parity check status of the configuration data EEP-
ROM. This signal is set to 1 by the DSP software if a
parity error is detected in any of the configuration
settings.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.7.7.3 TX 1 and 2, Course and Clearance

+5 V 1/1 (Normally high) +5 V supply voltage status.
+8.5 V 1/1 (Normally high) +8.5 V supply voltage status.
+27 V CSB 22/28 Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the
CSB power amplifier stage.
+27 V SBO 22/28 Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the
SBO power amplifier stage (not applicable for clear-
ance transmitters in GP equipment).
-15 V 0/0 (Normally low) -15 V supply voltage status.
CSB forward power 4W/9W Measurement of the forward power on the CSB out-
put.
CSB reverse power 0W/2W Measurement of the reverse power on the CSB out-
put.
SBO forward power 0.04W/1W Measurement of the forward power on the SBO out-
put.
SBO reverse power 0W/0.3W Measurement of the reverse power on the SBO out-
put.
CSB I-phase drive -0.5V/4.5V Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB I
modulator
CSB Q-phase drive -0.5V/4.5V Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB Q
modulator
SBO I-phase drive -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO I
modulator
SBO Q-phase drive -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO Q
modulator
Temperature -10/85 Measurement of the temperature of the power
amplifier assembly in degrees Celcius.
Reverse power status 1/1 (Normally high) Reverse power shutdown status. If the CSB or SBO
reverse power rises about a predetermined limit, this
status signal will toggle between OK and Fail with a
period of about 5 seconds as the power amplifier
drive signals are turned off and on to avoid overheat-
ing.
7.7.7.4 RF frontends for monitor 1, 2 and standby monitor (MF 1211/1219)

CL RF LEVEL HIGH Detects low Course Line RF level.
CL BASEBAND HIGH Detects low Course Line baseband level.
DS RF LEVEL HIGH Detects low Course Line RF level.
DS BASEBAND HIGH Detects low Course Line baseband level.
NF RF LEVEL HIGH Detects low Near Field RF level.
NF BASEBAND HIGH Detects low Near Field baseband level.
CLR RF LEVEL HIGH Detects low Clearance RF level.
CLR BASEBAND HIGH Detects low Clearance baseband level.

23137-I7/Rev.3/27-May-04
7.7.7.5 Monitor 1, 2 and standby (MO 1212)

V5P OK HIGH +5 V supply voltage ok/not ok.
STS ACT HIGH A/D conversion completed ok/not ok.
DSP PFO HIGH DSP +5 V ok/not ok.
DSP ERROR LOW DSP filter conversion completed ok/not ok.
DIAG RST HIGH For resetting diag. result (not used)
SYNC ERROR LOW DSP operation ok/not ok.
V15P OK HIGH +15 V supply voltage ok/not ok.
V15N OK LOW -15 V supply voltage ok/not ok.
7.7.7.6 Transmitter control board (TCA 1216)

EPROM PARITY CHECK LOW EPROM parity check ok/not ok.
INTEGRITY CHECK LOW Integrity check ok/not ok.
RC LINK STATUS HIGH Remote control link status ok/not ok. A warning is
generated if the TXC board does not receive a valid
data stream from the RC unit.
INTERNAL CL DDM -1.5/1.5(% Measurements on the Course CSB signal output
DDM) from the cabinet. Only measured on hot standby
systems. These signals are not associated with the
TCA 1216 board in the automatic diagnostic func-
tions.
INTERNAL CL SDM 76/84(%) See description for INTERNAL CL DDM.
INTERNAL CL RF 2.6/3.4 (V) See description for INTERNAL CL DDM.
7.7.7.6.1 Remote monitoring board (RMA 1215)

RMS V5P LEVEL 4.3/6 (V) +5V voltage measurement (Volt).
RMS LI BATT LEVEL 2.7/3.5 (V) Clock and RAM battery voltage measurement (Volt).
EPROM CHECK HIGH Program memory CRC check ok/not ok. Runs con-
tinuously, and completes every 30 minutes
(approx.).
RAM CHECK HIGH RAM read/write test. Runs continuously, and com-
pletes a check of all RAM every 15 minutes
(approx.).

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.7.7.7 Power supply 1 and 2 (PS 1227)
The measurements listed here are displayed in the DC SUPPLIES maintenance window in
the RMM software.

V15N LEVEL -16.8/-13.8 (V) Measurement of -15 V output voltage (Volt).
V5P LEVEL 4.6/5.9 (V) Measurement of +5 V output voltage (Volt).
V8P5P LEVEL 8.2/9.4 (V) Measurement of +8.5 V output voltage (Volt).
V15P LEVEL 13.8/16.8 (V) Measurement of +15 V output voltage (Volt).
7.7.7.8 External power
The measurements listed here are displayed in the DC SUPPLIES maintenance window in
the RMM software.

BATTERY V27P LEVEL 23/28 (V) Measurement of 27 V battery supply voltage.
BATTERY CURRENT -1/10 (A)
POWER CURRENT -1/20 (A)
CHARGER 1 STATUS ON Battery charger 1 status input.
CHARGER 2 STATUS ON Battery charger 2 status input.
7.7.7.9 User defined inputs
No default settings are defined for these parameters.
Measurement Description
USER_DIG0 - 7 8 user definable digital inputs/output.
TEMP_OUTDOOR Analog input for outdoor temperature sensor.
TEMP_INDOOR Analog input for indoor temperature sensor.
AC_LEVEL Analog input AC power level measurement.
ANA_CH1 - 3 3 user definable analog inputs.
7.7.8 Maintenance delay configuration
The factory default maintenance delays are as follows:
GEN delay: 20 seconds
EXT delay: 50 seconds
7.7.9 Morse code configuration
The factory default Morse code are “TST”.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.8 Typical TX Adjustments values
Table 7-16 lists typical values entered in the RMM software (menu item ILS | TX settings |
TX adjustments) entered in the RMM software for LLZ and GP equipment.
Note that the adjustment values incorporate both a modulation level setting and a small,
unpredictable, correction for individual variation on the low frequency generator boards
(LF1576). The correction is shown after the “±” sign in Table 7-16.
Parameter Values for LLZ (20 W) Values for GP (6 W/0.6 W)

Course RF Power 16.8 ± 1 12.7 ± 1
Course DDM 0 ± 0.1 0±1
Course SDM 40 ± 1 80 ± 1
Course Mod Id. 10 ± 1 N/A
Clearance RF Power 16.8 ± 1 12 ± 1
Clearance DDM 0 ± 0.1 40 ± 1
Clearance SDM 40 ± 1 80 ± 1
Clearance Mod Id. 10 ± 1 N/A
Table 7-16 Typical TX adjustment values
NOTE:
GP CLR DDM can be increasedup to 80% for only 150Hz modulation. Recommended range 40-55.
7.9 User administration configuration
The following user are set up on new equipment:
Username: MASTER
Password number 1: MASTER1
These passwords should be changed after the commissioning.
7.10 Frequency configuration strap settings
This section defines the strap settings on the OS 1221A (LLZ) and OS 1221B (GP) for the
standard ICAO Annex 10 ILS frequencies.
The strap settings for each frequency and equipment type are shown in Table 7-17. The
straps are numbered from A0 to A5 and N0 to N9. A0 is the bottom strap in two groups of
straps. (when the board is held as inserted in the cabinet).
An “X” character in the table means the strap must be inserted. A blank means the strap
must be removed.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7.10.1 OS 1221B strap settings for 1-frequency GP
The course transmitter frequency is set with straps in the J2 strap block.
Ch. freq. A A A A A A N N N N N N N N N N
(MHz) 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
329.15 X X X X X
329.3 X X X X X X X X
329.45 X X X X X X
329.6 X X X X X X
329.75 X X X X
329.9 X X X X X X
330.05 X X X X X
330.2 X X X
330.35 X X X X X X X X
330.5 X X X X X X X X X
330.65 X X X X X X X
330.8 X X X X X X X X
330.95 X X X X X X
331.1 X X X X X X X
331.25 X X X X X X X X
331.4 X X X X X X X
331.55 X X X X X X
331.7 X X X X X X X X
331.85 X X X X X X
332 X X X X X X
332.15 X X X
332.3 X X X X X X X X
332.45 X X X X X X X
332.6 X X X X X X
332.75 X X X X X X
332.9 X X X X X X X
333.05 X X X X X
333.2 X X X X X X X
333.35 X X X X X
333.5 X X X X X X
333.65 X X X X X X
333.8 X X X X X
333.95 X X X X
334.1 X X X X X X X X X
334.25 X X X X X X X
334.4 X X X X X X X
334.55 X X X X X
334.7 X X X X X X X
334.85 X X X X X X
335 X X X X X
Table 7-17 OS 1221B Course frequency settings for 1-freq. GP
For a 1-frequency GP the clearance (J102) frequency configuration straps are not inserted.

23137-I7/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8. Section 8 Detailed Technical Description
8.1 Main Cabinet
This Section gives a detailed description of the assemblies and modules in the NORMARC
7031B and 7032B.
Notations in the block diagrams:
~ - Active low signal.
[7:0] - Signal bus numbering system. Here, an eight bits bus, numbered
from seven down to zero.
The following paragraphs describe the electronics modules located in the main cabinet.
8.1.1 MF 1219A GlidePath Monitor Frontend
General Description:
The MF 1219A module comprises four identical circuits that receive RF monitoring signals
from the antenna monitoring network. The RF signals are detected and their baseband
signals (envelope of the signals) are generated. In addition the module generates DC sig-
nals proportional to the input RF levels. In two-frequency systems a pulse train which fre-
quency is identical to the difference of frequency between the CL- an CLR.signals are
extracted.
Block Diagram Description:
The block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 9-1. The four identical channels are:
• DS (Displacement Sensitivity)
• NF (Near Field)
• CL (Course Line)
• CLR (Clearance, used by two frequency systems only)
Each channel is divided into the following blocks: XX_FILT, XX_ RFAMP, XX_LEV,
XX_BASEB, and XX_LPFI. The CL channel is described below
In addition there is a frequency mixer circuit that generates the difference in frequency
between the CL- and CLR- input signals and a maintenance monitoring section which gen-
erates a maintenance warning to the RMS via an IIC bus if low modulation depth or low RF
level should occur.
CL_FILT
In this block the input RF signal is coarsely set to optimum performance level by combin-
ing any of the three jumper selectable attenuators of 6dB, 12dB, and 16dB resulting in 0
to 34dB input attenuation. Thus input levels from 0dBm to –35dBm may be accepted. The
following band pass filter rejects signals outside the ILS band to minimize out of band
interference.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
CL_RFAMP
The signal from CL_FILT is amplified and split into two separate branches.
The RF level_RF signal is applied to the RF level detector (see next block), while the other
branch is used for baseband processing and comprises a PIN diode attenuator which is
part of the automatic gain control (AGC) system.
The RF vernier control (R 2338 for CL channel) is used to fine-tune the input level to opti-
mum value.
CL_LEV
The temperature compensated diode detector processes the baseband of the RF input. Its
output signal is amplified and then split into two branches, one is low pass filtered, buff-
ered and applied to the monitor module MO 1212A (see section 9.1.2). This DC signal is
proportional to the input level of the channel and is being used to monitor the RF level.
The potentiometer RF LEVEL DC OUT is used for calibration of the display reading. The
other branch is connected to the CL_BASEB block there it is used to control the AGC circuit
(refer to description in next block).
CL_BASEB
This block comprises two functions:
Demodulation of the AGC controlled RF signal and generation of the AGC signal which con-
trols the gain of the PIN diode attenuator in CL_RFAMP. The diode detector is identical to
that of the CL_LEV.
After demodulation the baseband signal is amplified and the DC offset is removed before it
is applied to the LPFI block, see next block.
The AGC will keep the baseband signal at correct level, which is set by the potentiometer
of the voltage reference. This is the SDM calibration of the monitor.
To minimize settling time due to time constants of the AGC loop, a nominal AGC voltage is
inserted when no RF input signal is present. The size of this nominal voltage is adjusted
with the AGC_TIME potentiometer.
If a RF signal is detected by the RF_ LEV circuit the inserted voltage is switched off, and
the AGC loop starts operating normally from nominal operating conditions.
CL_LPFI
The active low pass filters in this block removes frequency components above the ILS
baseband. By turning the potentiometer in the filter the amplitude transfer function is
affected, thus the DDM reading is adjusted. This is a factory adjustment and will normally
not be necessary to carry out on site.
DF_MIXER
The CL- and CLR RF signals are feed to a frequency mixer, and its output is low pass fil-
tered and applied to a voltage comparator which generates the difference frequency in TTL
format.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
MAINTMON
This block compares the level of the baseband signals and RF levels from all four channels
of the module with preset limits and reports to the RMS if a signal is outside this range.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Page 8-4
Instruction Manual
23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
T P x x 2 3
R F L E V E L
T P 1 ...4
A G C A G C _ V O L T
A G C _ T IM E
P R E S E T
A G C L E V E L
R F L E V E L
V E R N IE R
R F IN P U T S T E P B A N D P A S S
A T T E N U A T O R F IL T E R IIC _ S C L
C O M P A R A T O R
M U X IIC _ S D A
C U R R E N T - L O W P A S S
C O N T R O L L E D F IL T E R
A T T E N U A T O R
C L _ F IL T
C L _ R F A M P
P a rt o f M A IN T M O N
V O L T A G E
R E F E R E N C E C L _ ID E N T
D F
A C T IV E M IX E R
D F _ M IX E R
B A S E B A N D
L O W P A S S F IL T E R
Figure 8-1 MF 1219A Block Diagram (CL channel shown)

H B K 5 5 4 -3
C L _ L P F I
C L _ B A S E B
F ro m C L R c h a n n e l
NORMARC 7031B-7032B

8.1.2 MO 1212A Monitor
The MO 1212A module digitally converts and processes NAV parameters, compares them
with programmable limits and reports alarm situations to the Station Control on TCA 1218
(Section 8.1.3) and the RMS.
Block Diagram:
Se Figure 8-2
Block Description:
LF_FRONT:
The analog signals from MF 1219A Monitor Frontend are multiplexed and digitized, and
the difference frequency (DF) pulse train is counted as a 12 bits value. These digital val-
ues are multiplexed into the FIFO along with the DC loop (DL_Detect[3:0]), External
(Ext_Val[11:0]) and test channels. The FIFO is seven words deep, and the sampling fre-
quency is 640 Hz/channel. Much of the functionality of LF-Front is handled by a FPGA
NMP101A which is described in Section Figure 8.1.2.1
A special self-test feature has been integrated into the monitor system for continuous
checking of the monitor integrity. This starts in the LF_FRONT by multiplexing a degener-
ated CL baseband into separate self-test channels. These signals are sampled and checked
in the same manner as the ordinary baseband signals. The test channels repeatedly
switches between normal signal values and degenerated signal values, thus toggling the
status of these channels between normal and alarm later in the monitor chain. If the CL
signals in the Station Control on TCA 1218 are normal, the test signals are checked for
toggling between normal and alarm states. If not toggling, the monitor is supposed to not
being able to detect alarms in the ordinary monitor signals, and the whole monitor is put
into alarm state. Based on the state of the other monitor, you will have an alarm
changeover/shutdown or a system warning.
DSP_FILTER
Performs all filtering in the Monitor. Data is read from the LF_FRONTEND FIFO, AC data
are FFT analysed and for the DC data mean values are calculated. The calculated parame-
ters are written to the COMPARATOR. DSP_FILTER consists of a TMS320C31 DSP, a mem-
ory block and a reset/watchdog circuit.
COMPARATOR
Compares the parameters received from DSP_FILTER with the programmed upper and
lower alarm limits. Alarm data are passed on to the Station Control and Terminator (on
TCA 1218 (Section 8.1.3) on a dedicated bus. The COMPARATOR generates both instanta-
neous and delayed alarms. The delayed signal is sent only if the alarm is still present after
the programmed delay period. All parameters, alarm and warning data are passed on to
the RMS via an output FIFO (warning information is treated by the RMS). The alarm and
warning limits and delays are stored in the local EEPROM. Much of the functionality of
COMPARATOR is handled by two FPGAs NMP102A and NMP103A described in Section
8.1.2.2.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.2.1 NMP101A Monitor Digital Frontend
General description:
NMP101A is a FPGA in the LF-FRONT block. It serves as an interface between the (digi-
tized) inputs from the monitor frontend MF 1219A and the DSP_FILTER block. NMP101A is
based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datash-
eet.
Block Diagram
See Figure 8-2
Block Description:
REF COUNTER
Divides the system clock (4.9152 MHz) for use in channel addressing. It also generates
the read/convert pulse to the external ADC.
DIFF FREQ COUNTER
Counts the pulse train that represents the frequency difference between the CL and CLR
signals. It generates a 12 bits value which multiplied by 20 gives the true frequency differ-
ence.
MUX
Selects between DF, one of sixteen channels from the ADC or one of the eight external
channels in a roundabout manner to the FIFO.
FIFO
Is a 7x17 bits first in first out queue with interface to the TMS320C31 DSP in the
DSP_FILTER block. The five most significant bits are channel address and the 12 least sig-
nificant bits are data. FIFO reports error to the COMPARATOR and data available (DAV)
status to the DSP.
8.1.2.2 NMP102A / NMP103A Comparator
NMP102A and NMP103A are two FPGA's providing most of the functionality of the COMPA-
RATOR block.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-2.
Block Description:
The block diagram shows both the NMP102A and NMP103A as a whole and blocks drawn
twice are found with the same functionality on both FPGA’s.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
INPUT LATCH:
Stores the parameter number and value coming from DSP_FILTER.
SEQUENCE CONTROLLER:
Controls the entire operation of reading alarm limits from the EEPROM, runs parity checks
on the alarm limit values, compares the parameter value from DSP_FILTER with upper and
lower alarm limits, reads and parity checks the alarm delay values and delays any alarms
correspondingly.
COMP:
Compares the parameter value from DSP_FILTER with the alarm limits from EEPROM and
generates a raw alarm.
DELAY:
Delays the raw alarms corresponding to the delay values in the EEPROM.
FIFO CONTROL:
Writes data into the FIFO when the comparator cycle is finished.
EEPROM INTERF.:
Controls the interface towards the EEPROM. EEPROM write is only allowed if RMS_LEVEL1
is a logic '0' (RMS access level3).
RMS INTERF.:
Is the interface to the RMS. It controls interrupt when data is ready in the FIFO and gen-
erates addresses for EEPROM programming and status and control signals.
PARITY CHECK:
Checks incoming data from the EEPROM. Single bit errors are corrected, and only a parity
warning is passed to the RMS. If two bits are erroneous, all output alarms are set, and a
parity error is passed to the RMS.
EEPROM:
The EEPROM is used to store the alarm limits. Warning limits used by the RMS are also
stored here.
FIFO:
The FIFO is used to streamline the data transfer to the RMS. One full set of 32 parameters
is written to the FIFO before the interrupt is activated.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Page 8-8
Instruction Manual
23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
TST_CH[1:0]
2 ANA_CH[3:0] SEQUENCE
TEST_RF_ERROR CONTROLLER
VOLT. TEST_RF_OK EXT_CH[2:0] MS_ALARM_RDY
REF. PAR_WR MONITOR
2 CLK REF EXT_ENA MS_ALARM_RAW SC ALARM
MUX COUNTER 5 12 BUS
4 DSP_DATA[11:0]
CL_BB_DGR COMP MS_AL_N 9 TO
LPF INPUT TCA1218A
5 5 LATCH DELAY MS_AL
CL-BASEBAND
DSP_DATA[16:12] 4 4
MS_AL_ID[4:0]
CL_RFLEVEL DIFF
FREQ RESET
CL_IDENT COUNTER AND
5
12 DIGITAL SIGNAL
ADO[11:0] 12 17 DO[16:0] CHECK PROCESSOR
DS_* 2 MUX AD MUX CIRCUIT
FROM FIFO PARITY
MF1211A EXT_VAL[11:0] 17 CHECK
NF_* 2 12
DAV
CLR_* 3
MT_AL_RDY
DL_DETECT_*
4 4 MONITOR
4 MT_AL_N TER ALARM
PARITY BUS
LF_DREAD CHECK DELAY MT_AL
ADDRESS TO
DL_REF* 4 TCA1218A
VOLT. DECODER MT_AL_ID[4:0]
REF.
5 MT_AL_RDY
NMP101 BOOT EXTERNAL
ANAFRONT EPROM RAM
DSP_FILTER
4.9152 MHz
SEQUENCE
CONTROLLER
DF
LF_FRONT
WR
FIFO
CONTROL FIFO
HBK555-3
RD
IOD[7:0]
RMS EEPROM
RMS BUS
Figure 8-2 MO 1212A Block Diagram

IOS[6:0] INTERF. INTERF. EEPROM
RMS_LEVEL1
FROM
TCA1218A
NMP 102/103A
COMPARATOR
NORMARC 7031B-7032B

8.1.3 TCA 1218 Transmitter Control Assembly
The TCA 1218A Transmitter Control Assembly consists of the transmitter control TC 1216A
and Local Control (front panel) LC 1217A. It is used in the cold standby equipment
The TCA 1218B Transmitter Control Assembly consists of the transmitter control TC 1216A
and Local Control (front panel) LC 1217B. It is used in the hot standby equipment
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5 All blocks except Local Control are located on TC 1216A.
Description of selected signals:
MON1 SC ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from monitor MO 1212A no.1. Consists of M1S_AL_ID[4:0],
~M1S_AL_RDY, M1S_AL, ~M1S_AL_N and M1S_AL_RAW.
MON2 SC ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from monitor MO 1212A no.2. Consists of M2S_AL_ID[4:0],
~M2S_AL_RDY, M2S_AL, ~M2S_AL_N and M2S_AL_RAW.
STB MON ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from standby monitor MO 1212A. Consists of ~MSTBS_AL_RDY
and MSTBS_AL. Only used for hot standby configurations.
RMS BUS:
Interface to the RMS. Consists of IOD[7:0], IOCS, IOS[2:0].
MON1 TRM ALARM BUS:
Terminator alarm bus from monitor MO 1212A no.1. Consists of M1T_AL_ID[4:0],

~M1T_AL_RDY, M1T_AL, ~M1T_AL_N and M1T_AL_RAW.
MON2 TRM ALARM BUS:
Terminator alarm bus from monitor 2. Consists of M2T_AL_ID[4:0], ~M2T_AL_RDY,

M2T_AL, ~M2T_AL_N and M2T_AL_RAW.
RC_BUS:
Interface to the line interface circuits for the remote control interface on CI 1210A (Sec-
tion 8.1.11). Consists of SDIN, SDOUT, ~CD.
Block Description:
STATION CONTROL (SC MON DATA DETECTOR, SC STATE MACHINE CONTROL, SC EVENT
DETECTION)
Interprets the alarm bus from the monitors MO 1212A and generates alarm (and standby

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
alarm for hot standby configurations). These signals together with inputs from local con-
trols (on LC 1217), remote controls (via CI 1210A), RMS inputs and configuration setup
(in EEPROM and jumper settings) determine the state/state change for the NORMARC
70xxB transmitter state. Status information are generated and sent to local control panel
(LC 1217) and remote control panel (via CI 1210A). The RMS can poll the state of the sta-
tion control at any time. State changes generate an interrupt signal to the RMS. STATION
CONTROL can shut off the transmitters GPA1581A by turning off the RF-oscillators OS
1221B.
Most of the functionality of STATION CONTROL is handled by three FPGAs NMP104A,

NMP105A and NMP106A described in Sections 8.1.3.1 - 8.1.3.3.
TERMINATOR
Interprets the alarm bus from the monitors MO 1212A and generates alarm. This signal
together with local controls (on LC 1217), remote controls (via CI 1210A), RMS inputs and
configuration setup (in EEPROM and jumper settings) determine the state of the termina-
tor alarm (TRM_AL) output. TERMINATOR has an extra 1s delay, so that the STATION
CONTROL has time to fulfil transmitter state changes before the terminator shuts the
NORMARC 70xxB down. Terminator alarm shuts the NORMARC 70xxB down by discon-
necting the power supply from the output stage of the transmitters GPA 1581A .
Most of the functionality of TERMINATOR is handled by FPGA NMP107A described in Sec-

tion 8.1.3.4.
REMOTE CONTROL IF:
This unit converts signals from the station control and terminator to serial messages (1
message is 2 bytes long). This is done continuously (approximately 10 messages/s). The
serial input from the remote control is converted to parallel format. Messages from the
remote control are accepted only if two equal messages are received in sequence. If no
valid message is received within 2s, the remote control interface asserts a failure signal to
inform the station control and terminator that the link to the remote control is broken.
Depending on the configuration setup, this will turn the NORMARC 70xxB off.
CONFIG
Jumper plugs for configuration of the NORMARC 70xxB.
DEBOUNCE
Consists of debouncing circuitry for signals from switches on LC 1217 and jumper plugs
for setting access levels for remote control.
LOCAL CONTROL
Consist of keys, switches, switchlocks lamps and indicators located on LC 1217 used to
control and indicate operational status of the NORMARC 70xxB.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.3.1 NMP104A Station Control Monitor Data Detector
NMP104A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL block. It serves as a monitor alarm/
error detection and monitor alarm voting unit. NMP104A is based on the Actel ACT1020
FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5.
Block Description:
MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION
This block decodes the MON1 SC Alarm bus and generates alarm if the monitor MO 1212A
no 1 has set the alarm flag for any of the 32 parameters received in a set. Error checks
includes parameter identity sequence check, AL_N negated of AL, test channel alarm tog-
gling and timeout for RDY-signal. Any alarm/error will set the monitor alarm output
(M1_ALARM) for the duration of next 32 parameters, meaning that 32 parameters without
alarm/error must be received in sequence before the alarm output is reset.
Same as for MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION, but for MON2 SC alarm bus.
VOTING
This block provides monitor alarm (VALARM) to the NMP105A depending on jumper con-
figuration (1 of 2 or 2 of 2 voting) in the CONFIG block and inputs from the two MO 1212A
monitors (not including standby monitor). When configured for 2 of 2 voting, both
MO 1212A monitors must give alarm to set the VALARM output. When configured for 1 of
2 voting, alarm from one of the two MO 1212A monitors is sufficient to set VALARM.
STB ALARM DETECTION
Alarm flag for any parameter sets the alarm immediately. The alarm will be reset when 32
parameters are received in sequence with no alarm flag set.
PUSHBUTTON ONESHOTS
To prevent locking up of push button keyboard signals, this block translates the input sig-
nals from the switches on LC 1217 from levels (high or low) to pulse stream.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.3.2 NMP105A Station Control Event Detection
NMP105A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL BLOCK. It serves as an event detection
and control unit. The NMP105A also includes the station control RMS-interface. The event
information is output to the station control state machine controller NMP106A. NMP105A
is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datash-
eet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-5.
Block Description:
RMS INTERFACE
The RMS interface provides interface to the RMS BUS
LAMP STATUS GENERATION
This block generates lamp status information for the LOCAL CONTROL and REMOTE CON-
TROL IF blocs.
RMS LEVEL DETECT
This block decodes RMS access levels 2 and 3 using access configuration in CONFIG block,
write disable switchlock information from LOCAL CONTROL, access grant from Remote
Control IF and access requests from the RMS.
EVENT DETECT
The event detect unit checks for valid events (for example key press, alarm interlock
etc.), and sends valid event number to the station control state machine controller
NMP106A. Events not valid for the current mode of operation are ignored. Events are
given priorities with interlock as the highest priority. The alarm event has the next priority,
while the other events are polled one by one. The event detect unit also has a built in
integrity check. This function works when the ILS is in normal operational mode (auto-
matic mode with transmitters on and no alarm). When the ON/OFF is pressed, a
FORCE_AL signal is output. This signal turns off all transmitters (GPA1581A ) without noti-
fying the rest of the system. The loss of transmitted signal will be detected by the moni-
tors (MO 1212) and cause monitor alarms to the STATION CONTROL.This alarm will result
in a TX changeover initiated by STATION CONTROL, but since STBY TX is also turned off,
monitor alarm will remain and cause TX shutdown after alarm delay. This sequence
ensures that the monitoring circuits and shutdown mechanisms operates as intended. If
the integrity check function should fail, a timeout function shuts the ILS down.
INTERRUPT DETECT
This block detects transmitter state changes and stores the event causing the change.
Transmitter feedback and coax relay position is also stored. An interrupt is generated to
inform the RMS that a transmitter state change has occurred.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
TX 20 SEC DELAY
This function ensures that no transmitters are allowed to transmit for 20 seconds after an
alarm shutdown has occurred.
MAIN SELECT STORE
This block stores the information regarding which transmitter that is selected as main
transmitter.
INTERLOCK DELAY
This block turns on the transmitters 20 seconds after the interlock signal from the
REMOTE CONTROL IF block has been deactivated.
8.1.3.3 NMP106A Station Control State Machine Control
NMP106A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL block. It serves mainly as a state
machine controller (states are stored in an EPROM) for transmitter on/off control.
NMP106A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the
ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-4.
Block Description:
SEQUENCER
This block generates strobes and control signals for running the state machine. New states
are triggered based on received new data from NMP105A (on the STO_BUS). This block
also generates reset to the hardware watchdog safeguarding and controlling the station
control reset.
EVENT CHECK
This block checks event and main select signal received from NMP105A. Two identical
event/main select signals must be received in sequence before the event/main select is
acted upon.
TIMER
Used by the state machine for delays/timeouts for state changes.
DELAY
Delays the coax relay position feedback in state change sequences. Ensures that the coax
relay (Section 8.1.7) will not change position while the transmitters are transmitting.
PARITY CHECK
This block checks the parity of each byte read from the state machine content EPROM.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Parity failure results in transmitter shutdown.
LOCKUP DETECT
This block detects failures in the state machine sequence. It will trigger if the state
machine doesn’t become idle within a specified time. Failures results in transmitter shut-
down.
EPROM READ DATA ADDRESS
This block is an address counter setting the address for the state machine EPROM during
reading through the RMS. The RMS can either reset or increment the address counter. The
feedback from these control strobes, address bit 0 and EPROM data byte are transferred
to the NMP105A for reading by the RMS.
TX ON/OFF CONTROL
This block controls the on/off state of the transmitters. Default is leaving the transmitters
in the state reported by their feedback signals, thereby providing no change in transmitter
state. However, if PARITY CHECK failure or event LOCKUPDETECT failure is detected, the
transmitters are turned off.
LOCAL LAMP STATUS
Local panel lamp outputs to the LOCAL CONTROL BLOCK are provided based on coax relay
position, TX main select, transmitter status and station status received from NMP105A.
EPROM ADDR MUX
This block selects EPROM addressing either for STATE MACHINE or RMS read control.
8.1.3.4 NMP107A Terminator
NMP107A is a FPGA providing most of the TERMINATOR function. The terminator function
is to provide a transmitter shutoff function if the STATION CONTROL should fail to do so.
NMP107A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the
ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-4.
Block Description:
RMS INTERFACE
The RMS interface provides the interface to the RMS BUS.
RMS LEVEL DETECT
This block decodes RMS access levels 2 and 3 using access configuration in CONFIG block,
write disable switchlock information from LOCAL CONTROL, access grant from REMOTE
CONTROL IF and access requests from the RMS.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
EVENT DETECT
The event detect unit checks for valid events (for example on/off-key, alarm, interlock
etc.), and sends valid events to the terminator state check. Events not valid for the cur-
rent mode of operation are ignored.
TERMINATOR STATE CHECK
This block acts upon events/states received from the EVENT DETECT block. Alarm/inter-
lock states are allowed to be active for 1 second before terminator alarm is activated. The
terminator alarm is then reset if an on/off-event is detected, thereby starting a new 1 sec-
ond timeout. The STATION CONTROL must now stabilise the ILS with no alarm within this
1-second period of time if a TERMINATINATOR shutdown should be avoided. If terminator
is triggered by alarm or interlock while transmitters are transmitting, an interrupt is gen-
erated. The RMS can then read the cause of the interrupt through the RMS BUS.
INTERLOCK FILTER
This block overrides the interlock signal in interlock override mode of operation. To enable
interlock override mode of operation the interlock override switchlock must be activated,
the local/remote switch must be in local position and the auto/manual switch must be in
manual position.
This unit decodes the MON1 TRM ALARM BUS and generates alarm if the monitor
MO 1212A no. 1 has set the alarm flag for any of the 32 parameters received in a set.
Error checks includes parameter identity sequence check, AL_N negated of AL, test chan-
nel alarm toggling and timeout for RDY-signal. Any alarm/error will set the monitor alarm
output (M1ALARM) for the duration of the next 32 parameters, meaning that 32 parame-
ters without alarm/error must be received before the alarm output is reset.
Same as for MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION but for MON2 TRM ALARM BUS.
VOTING
This block provides a monitor alarm (~VALARM) depending on jumper configuration (1 of

2 or 2 of 2 voting) in the CONFIG block and inputs from the two MO 1212A monitors (not
including STBY monitor). When configured for 2 of 2 voting both MO 1212A monitors must
give alarm to set the ~VALARM output. When configured for 1 of 2 voting alarm from one
of the two MO 1212A monitors is sufficient to set the ~VALARM.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.3.5 NMP109A Remote Control Interface
NMP109A is a FPGA providing most of REMOTE CONTROL IF function. The NMP109A trans-
fers data between STATION CONTROL and TERMINATOR and the remote control (via CI
1210A). NMP109A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see
the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-5.
Block Description:
STB LAMP FILTER
This block provides the standby lamp information to be sent to remote control by the TX
UART.
TX UART
Converts parallel data to 2-bytes serial messages. Protocol for the serial data SDOUT
(sent I 1210A) is start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity.
RX UART
Converts serial data SDIN received from remote control (via CI 1210A) to parallel data (2
bytes).
MESSAGE DETECTOR
Messages from RX UART are accepted only if two identical messages are received in
sequence. If so, the data output latch is updated and a new-message pulse is generated.
NEW MESSAGE TIMER
Checks whether an OK message from MESSAGE DETECTOR and carrier detect signal from
CI 1210A is present. Missing message or no carrier detect for 2 seconds or more gives
timeout signal to DATA FILTER.
DATA FILTER
In case the NEW MESSAGE TIMER has signalled a timeout (indicating missing messages)
this block will modify the data received from the MESSAGE DETECTOR by forcing the
TX_OFF signal to on (configurable). If configuration enables interlock, the interlock signal
is also forced active.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Debounce and
LED driver
NORMARC 7031B-7032B
MON1 Station Controller
Station Controller

Alarm-bus
20 sec.
delay
Alarm detection
and Lamp
Voting status
generation
MON2 NMP104A Station Controller
Station Controller Event Detector
On / Off
Alarm-bus & Forced alarm signals
Event machine
Configuration to
OS1221
Course TX1 Course TX1
Course TX2 Course TX2
CLR TX1 CLR TX1
U13 U6 CLR TX2 CLR TX2
NMP105A &
NMP106A Coax Control
MON1
Terminator
Alarm-bus
Terminator
Alarm detection
Event Detector
and Terminator Alarm
&
Voting On / Off signal
Status check
to
Figure 8-3 TCA 1218 Block Diagram

MON2 PS1227
Part of NMP107A Part of NMP107A
Terminator
Alarm-bus Terminator
To CI1210A
Remote Control
(MONCO)
interface
RMS Data-bus
HBK 1303-1
Page 8-17
23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Instruction Manual
8.1.4 LF 1576A Low Frequency Generator
General Description
LF 1576A provides the audio signals to be modulated onto the carrier signal in the trans-
mitter. The levels of the 90Hz, 150Hz, RF level, ident level and ident Morse code is pro-
grammable from the RMS.
The setup for generating the baseband output signals is stored in non-volatile memory on
board, and consists of values in numeric form for all the frequency components of the sig-
nals. The low-frequency output signals are continuously calculated by the DSP using a for-
mula that takes into account modulation levels, phase and ident signalling. The user can
alter the setup when logged in with access level 3 (or higher).
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-4. The block descriptions refer to the names on the block diagram.
Block Description:
DIGITAL
This block is composed of all the digital parts of the design (except for the self-test func-
tion)
I/O SYSTEM
The I/O-system basically consists of the FPGA NMP 137, and does the following tasks:
• Generates status to the IIC INTERFACE (SELFTEST).
• Passes protocol messages between the RMS and the DSP by converting data
between the RMS bus and the DSP DATA bus.
• Limits write access to the memory, so that the DSP cannot alter the sources for the
signal generation while not allowed by the system access level of the system.
• Generates 30Hz test signal (controlled by the DSP).
• Converts RMS bus data to PA IIC control data (LOCAL DATA BUS on block schematic)
and vice versa.
• Calculates Voice and DME control output.
PA IIC CTRL, UTILITY
Converts LOCAL DATA BUS from the I/O SYSTEM to PA IIC BUS data, and vice versa. It
also generates 16 digital spare outputs, which again is controlled by the DSP.
DSP
This block consists of a Digital Signal Processor with supporting circuits. An oscillator at
32.768 MHz clocks the DSP.
The DSP runs the program NMS 221. The program basically generates the LF-values sent
to the two four-channel DACs in the analog part. This is done by calculating the frequency
components in real-time based on stored values in the memory system. The scaling of the
frequency components and the behaviour of the analog outputs can be altered by the RMS
through a dedicated RMS-DSP protocol. NMS 221 also generates the 30Hz test signal.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
MEMORY
Is the memory in the system, and consists of a FLASH device with the DSP program NMS
221 (loaded at start up), and an EEPROM for storing non-volatile data. The EEPROM is not
permitted to be written to unless in access level 3 (see I/O SYSTEM).
SERIAL (optional)
This is a serial interface used for debugging the software, and is not present for ordinary
production line boards.
IIC INTERFACE (SELFTEST)
The internal selftest systems are an IIC device with eight inputs. Four of them are dedi-
cated for the status of the internal voltages (2.5V, 3.3V, 15V and -15V). The other four
inputs are dedicated for the status of the digital system (DSP alive, RMS alive, DSP Flash
memory fail and DSP EEPROM memory fail). These inputs are read by the RMS on the IIC
bus.
ANALOG
Comprises the analog circuitry of the board (amplifiers, filters etc.) plus the DAC circuits.
In addition a high precision voltage reference is provided.
COU BASEBAND MOD and CLR BASEBAND MOD

• Converts serial data from DSP to the actual signals sent to the transmitter. This
includes:
• Digital to analog conversions for CSB, SBO I and SBO Q
• Mixing of voice signals onto baseband
• Selecting between analog and digital voice input.
• Generation of ident signals (filtered from CSB baseband).
COU DAC and CLR DAC
Digital to Analog Converters that converts serial data from the DSP to actual LF outputs.
The resolution of the DACs used is 14-bits.
VOLT REF (10V)
Reference voltage used by the analog circuitry.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
,,&%86
9
9 ,,&
9 ,17(5)$&(
9
6(/)7(67
67$786
506 /2&$/
'$7$ '$7$%86
3$,,& 3$,,&%86
%86 &75/
,26<67(0 6<65(6(7 87,/,7<
103$ 3$,,&567
767
92,&(&75/
'0(,'(17287
:5&75/
RS232
'63'$7$%86
0(025<
COU Ident
CLR Ident
'63 6(5,$/
237,21$/
',*,7$/
6(5,$/'$7$ %$6(%$1'
6,*1$/6
&28&6%
$ ]

5() &286%2,
%
92,&( $&
,1
&
5()'
'
&28'$&
&28%$6(%$1'02'
&/5&6%
$ ]

5() &/56%2,
%
$&
& &/56%24
5()'
' 63$5($1/*
&/5'$&
&/5%$6(%$1'02'
92/75()
9 $1$/2*
/)$
HBK 1284-1
Figure 8-4 LF 1576A Block Diagram

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.5 OS 1221B RF Oscillator
The OS 1221B module generates the RF signals used for the generation of the carrier sig-
nals in the transmitters (Section 8.1.6).
Block Diagram:
C H A N N E L
S E L E C T C O U
P R O G R A M A B L E 6 4
D IV ID E R
F R E Q U E N C Y M O D U L U S 2
A D J U S T D IV ID E R
F R E Q .
T E S T
P O IN T M O D U L U S S E L E C T
R F
X -T A L O S C IL L A T O R
1 2 d B
P H A S E L O W P A S S B A N D P A S S O S C _ C O U _ R F
D E T E C T O R F IL T E R V C O F IL T E R
W IN D O W L O C K D E T E C T T O IIC B U S
C O M P .
L O C K S C H M .T R L O C K D E T E C T T O IIC B U S
D E T E C T L A T C H
S C H M .T R L O C K D E T E C T T O IIC B U S
C O U T x O N /O F F
C H A N N E L
S E L E C T C L R
P R O G R A M A B L E 6 4
D IV ID E R
M O D U L U S 2
D IV ID E R
M O D U L U S S E L E C T
R F
O S C IL L A T O R
1 2 d B
P H A S E L O W P A S S B A N D P A S S O S C _ C L R _ R F
D E T E C T O R F IL T E R V C O F IL T E R
W IN D O W L O C K D E T E C T T O IIC B U S
C O M P .
L O C K S C H M .T R L O C K D E T E C T T O IIC B U S
D E T E C T L A T C H
S C H M .T R L O C K D E T E C T T O IIC B U S
C L R T x O N /O F F H B K 5 8 7 -4
Figure 8-5 OS 1221B Block Diagram

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Block Description:
The RF signal is generated by a voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) built around a Dual
Gate Mosfet Transistor, chosen because of its good noise properties, and the possibility to
have an isolated output at the drain.
A part of the signal is fed back, via a buffer for isolation, to a divide by 64, modulus 2
prescaler. This is connected to a MC145152-2, a phase locked loop circuit that performs
the counting and control of the prescaler. The total count, and thereby the frequency, is
set by inserting shunts onto an array of pins.
Please find tables of jumper settings in Section 7.11
The internal oscillator of the Course PLL is also used to control the Clearance PLL.
A combined low-pass filter and integrator is built around an operational amplifier, that
generates the control voltage for the RF oscillator. This control voltage is also fed to a win-
dow comparator that alarms the system via the I2C-bus if it falls outside its limits. Another
control of the PLL is via the Lock Detect output of the PLL. The Lock Detect output of the
PLL circuit is fed to a low pass filter and a transistor. This output consists of narrow nega-
tive going pulses when the loop is locked, and wide pulses of variable width when out of
lock. Therefore the transistor will be turned off when in lock, and on when out of lock.
The output from the transistor goes to two Schmidt triggers, one latching and one
unlatching. The latching Schmidt trigger turns the signal off if the loop goes out of lock
and alarms the I2C-bus. It is reset by power on and/or a low transition of the COU_OFF
signal (CLR_OFF for the clearance channel). The other Schmidt trigger is used to inform
the system of the situation that the loop have been out of lock, but is in lock at the
present time even if the signal is turned off (this might be the situation if a short drop in
the 12V supply occurs, or a change in frequency setting has taken place).
The signal ON/OFF switching is done in two steps. The first is a diode switch and the next
is a Dual Gate Mosfet transistor that can be turned off by taking its control gate to a low
potential. This transistor acts as a buffer for the signal when in the on state. At the output
of this transistor, a second order bandpass filter follows, that serves as an output match of
the transistor and to filter out harmonics of the output voltage. The last stage is a 12dB
gain block that delivers 10mW of power to the PC1225 card.
The Clearance channel is identical to the Course channel except for the crystal oscillator
for the PLL.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.6 GPA 1581A GP COU Power Amplifier Assembly
The Glide Path Power Amplifier Assembly GPA 1581A consists of CB 1601Aand PA 1578A
mounted together as shown on Figure 8-6.
The GPA 1581A receives RF signals and LF signals from the OS 1221B Oscillator (Section
8.1.5) and LF 1576A low frequency generator (Section 8.1.4) respectively. The outputs
from the GPA 1581A are carrier sideband (CSB) signal and sideband only (SBO) signal.
Detected samples of the CSB and SBO signals are available on the BNC connectors on the
front panel. Power measurements and status signals are interfaced to the RMS.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-7 and Figure 8-8.
Description of operation:
The CSB input signal is supplied to both I and Q inputs in the CSB amplifier. In the SBO
amplifier, separate inputs are used for I and Q to allow phase adjustment of the SBO sig-
nal.
The difference between the modulating I and Q signals and the feedback signals is ampli-
fied through the Error amplifier. The I and Q error signals are mixed with an in-phase and
a quadrature LO signal in the Modulator. LP filtering is applied to remove harmonic mixer
products. The resulting RF signal is then amplified to a suitable signal level for the PA
input. A forward coupled signal from the directional coupler at the PA output is BP filtered
at the Demodulator input. The RF signal is then mixed with an in-phase and a quadrature
LO signal. LP filtering is applied on the resulting I and Q baseband signals to remove resid-
ual RF. DC offset is eliminated from I and Q feedback signals before they are subtracted
from the I and Q input signals.
This effectively forms a control loop that tracks and eliminates amplitude and phase errors
made by the PA, although a small error will always be present. This linearisation- tech-
nique is known as Cartesian Feedback.
Description of blocks:
1. AGC and splitter
The AGC ensures that the modulators and demodulators are supplied with a constant LO
signal independent of the oscillator output level. The AGC has a dynamic range of approx-
imately 6dB. The splitters first split the modulator and demodulator paths, and then split
each in CSB and SBO paths
2. Phase control
• Mosfet based phase compensator with 270 degrees of phase adjustment.
• The phaseshift is obtained by changing the voltage across a varicap, controlled from
the IIC bus.
• The phaseshifted LO signal is buffered with a second FET stage and a gainblock.
Hence the proper signal level and isolation is obtained.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
• The uncompensated branch is buffered with a gainblock only.

• Buffering of LO signal to give sufficient LO level, and give isolation between the mod-
ulator and demodulator LO inputs.
3. Error amplifier
• The difference between I/Q signals and I/Q feedback signals is amplified and fed to
the I/Q modulator and to the Maint. Monitor (I-drive, Q-drive).
• Differential inputs eliminates DC offset on the baseband signal.
• A precision Op Amp with sufficient bandwidth compared to required loop bandwidth
has been deployed as error amp. The op-amp operates as an integrator.
• Switches are included for open-loop and unity gain settings in the alignment pro-
cess, controlled by the IIC bus.
• In the CSB path I-off and Q-off signals allow adjustment of the I-path and Q-path
separately, controlled by the IIC bus.
• Protection mechanism for high VSWR and high temperature power down. Attenua-
tion of the input signal to the error-amplifier to turn off the PA output, in case of high
VSWR or temperature.
• Protection mechanism to delay the loop gain until the PA is fully powered.
4. Modulator
• Direct modulation by means of Gilbert-cell mixers. Baseband and LO input, modu-
lated RF output.
• The LO to the I and Q modulators is provided by a 90º hybrid.
5. PA
• Input power: 6 dBm
• The CSB amplifier uses a driver stage with 2 RF mosfet transistors, and an output
stage with one push-pull double RF mosfet transistor. The SBO amplifier uses 2 RF
mosfets.
• The CSB amplifier for GP CLR uses uses 2 RF mosfets.
• A hybrid coupler is located on the PA board. Forward coupled signal is attenuated
and split to a monitor output and to the feedback loop. Reverse coupled signal is
detected on the PA board. Reverse signal controls VSWR power down switches on
the Error amp board.
6. Splitter/attenuators
• A resistive splitter splits the forward coupled signal in one path to the demodulator
and one path to the power measurement and test connector circuits.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
7. Demodulator
• Direct demodulation by means of Gilbert-cell mixers. RF and LO input, baseband
output.
• The LO to the I and Q demodulators is provided by a 90º hybrid.
• DC offset adjustment eliminates DC offset from the I and Q demodulator output in
the feedback loop.
• Gain adjustment to set equal gain in I and Q paths.
• The circuit is composed of Op-amps and digital controlled variable resistors. The
variable resistors are controlled through an IIC bus.
• Lowpass filters on the output of the demodulator to prevent RF overload of the base-
band sections.
8. Maintenance circuits
• A 8-input A/D converter measures forward and reverse power in the CSB and SBO
outputs. It also reads the I and Q drive level to the modulators (normal operation) or
the output from the demodulators (test mode).
• A temperature sensor IC provide temperature measurements, and also can provide
an over-temperature signal to the error amplifier.
• The measurements are sent to the RMS system through the IIC bus.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 8-6 GPA 1581A Assembly

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 8-7 GPA 1581A CSB Block Diagram

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Figure 8-8 GPA 1581A SBO Block Diagram

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.7 Change-Over Relays
The change-over relays are located on the top of the transmitter subrack. They connect
Tx1 to the antenna output, and Tx2 to the dummy load(s) or vice versa, controlled from
the TCA 1218 module. The single frequency equipments use 2 relays for COU CSB and
COU SBO.
In the hot standby systems, additional directional couplers are inserted between the coax-
ial relays and the dummy loads to give signals to the standby monitor.
Block Diagram:
C O A X C O N T R O L
M O N IT O R
C S B C S B
T X 1
O U T P U T
5 0 o h m C S B
C O A X
R E L A Y
C S B
T X 2
C O U P L E R
C O A X C O N T R O L
S B O
T X 1
O U T P U T
5 0 o h m S B O
C O A X
R E L A Y
S B O
T X 2 H B K 1 2 8 9 -1
Figure 8-9 Change-over system Block Diagram

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.8 SC 898C Signal combiner (Hot Standby only)
SC 898C combines a CSB and a SBO input into one combined CSB/SBO output for use in
standby transmitter DS simulation.
Block Diagram:
DC420C
CSB 50
ohms SC898C
FROM -18dB
COAXIAL
R2
RELAY
LLZ: +10dBm
DC420C GP: +15dBm R1 R3
SBO 50
ohms
U1
-8dB
15-35dB att. R9
R6 DS
R11 R8 R7
R5 R4
R10
HBK572-3
Figure 8-10 System Diagram standby TX CL/DS simulation
System Description:
Refer to the system diagram above. CSB and SBO signals from the STB transmitter are
sampled through the directional couplers (DC420C) and fed to the input ports CSB and
SBO respectively on the SC898C signal combiner. The cable lengths are cut such that the
input phase difference of P2 is 180°.
Block Description:
The unit has two input ports and one output port. The assembly consists of a 18dB fixed
attenuator, a15-35dB adjustable attenuator, and a 3 dB 0 phase signal combiner(P2).
The purpose of the unit is to combine samples of the CSB and SBO signals from the trans-
mitter and produce standard Course Sector DDM signal output.
In order to combine to a standard value DDM at the DS port the RF phases of the 90 and
150Hz sidebands from the CSB signal must be in antiphase (180°) with the SBO signal at
the input ports of the combiner P2. The DDM is then given by the equation
ESBO
DDM 2
ECSB
DDM expressed in absolute value, ESBO and ECSB given in relative voltage values.
The adjustable attenuator R4 is provided for accurately setting of the DS DDM value.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.9 PS 1227C Power Supply
PS 1227C supplies the NORMARC 70xxB cabinet with +27V, ±15V, +8.5V and +5V, from a
+27V input.
Block Diagram:
T R M _ A L
V 2 7 P V 2 7 _ C S B _ C O U 1
A
I2 7 _ C S B _ C O U 1
G N D
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C O U 1
A
I2 7 _ S B O _ C O U 1
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C L R 1
A
I2 7 _ C S B _ C L R 1
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C L R 1
A
I2 7 _ S B O _ C L R 1
D C V 1 5 P
S Y N C D C V 1 5 P _ M E A S
V 1 5 N
D C
V 1 5 N _ M E A S
D C
V 9 P
D C
V 9 P _ M E A S
D C
V D D
D C
H B K 1 2 9 0 -2 V D D _ M E A S
D C
Figure 8-11 PS 1227 Block Diagram
Block description:
The ±15V, +8.5V and +5V supplies are provided by integrated DC/DC converter modules.
PS 1227 can operate in redundancy with a second power supply using or'ing diodes. The
output voltages are measured prior to these or'ing diodes, to be able to identify a power
failure.
The four 27V outputs supply the GPA 1581A power amplifiers. The current drains are con-
verted to a voltages used for current measurement. The ILS output signals may be shut
down by cutting off the 27V supplies. This is done by the TERMINATOR alarm signal
(TRM_AL) (Section 8.1.3.4).

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.10 RMA 1215A RMS Assembly
General description
The RMA 1215A is a microprocessor based assembly that contains the RMS software, and
also forms the basis for the NORMARC 7000B RMM system. The RMA 1215A consists of
KD 1214A front panel with keyboard and display, and the RM 1213A the RMS module.
Block Diagram:
RM1213A
Watchdog
Jumper RESET
Memory
Battery
RAM
EPROM
EEPROM
Interrupts Interrupt
circutry CPU
Real time
clock
CTRL
port
IIC IIC bus

controller
Analog
MUX
Three serial
+
Analog A channels.
voltages D
- Double RS232
UART drivers
Analog
MUX
KD1214A
CTRL
CTRL port Display
port
Ident
speaker
Det. CTRL
Analog port
ident MUX
Keypad
CTRL RMS bus
port
HBK588-1
Figure 8-12 RMA 1215A Block Diagram
Block Description.
CPU
The CPU is an 80C188EB micro controller with addresses decoding unit and two UARTs.
Only one of these UARTs is utilised for serial communication. The other has been mapped
as a parallel IO port. The operating frequency of the CPU is 20 MHz provided by an exter-
nal 40 MHz oscillator.
WATCHDOG AND BATTERY
A watchdog resets the CPU at power up and if the CPU does not toggle the watchdog reset
bit within approx. 1.6 sec. intervals, or if the +5V supply voltage goes below the battery
voltage. In the latter case battery voltage will be connected to the RAM and RTC. Removal
of the battery or jumper S1 will cause the RESET line to go low and inhibit any function on
the module. If a battery is not available, operation can be achieved by shortening the bat-
tery socket. The battery can be disconnected by removing jumper S1 when the module is

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
being stored. The battery voltage is measured using an optocoupler switch in order not to
discharge the battery. The battery provides approximately one month of memory reten-
tion at continuous use (system power turned off). RMS battery status is reported by the
RMS system as Maintenance Parameter RMS BATTERY.
INTERRUPT CIRCUITRY
The interrupt circuitry combines several interrupts into the 5 interrupt inputs of the CPU.
DISPLAY
The display used is a 20 characters by 4 lines LCD.
KEYPAD
The keypad consists of seven pushbuttons, directly connected to a parallel input port.
DOUBLE UART
The dual UART is a standard UART with a 16 byte bidirectional FIFO on both channels.
RS 232 DRIVERS
The RS 232 drivers are single supply RS 232 drivers. They provide the interface between
the UARTs and external PCs and modems.
IIC CONTROLLER
The IIC controller handles the communication on the IIC bus which is the main communi-
cation bus for maintenance data collection in the NM 70xx ILS.
REAL TIME CLOCK
The real time clock keeps track of the date and time. Date and time is used to timestamp
monitor and maintenance data sets. The RTC accuracy is better than 15 seconds per 24
hours.
CTRL PORT
The CTRL ports in the block diagram are parallel IO ports for the CPU.
ANALOGUE INTERFACE
The analogue interface block contains two analogue multiplexers and an A/D-converter.
The main function of this block is to measure analogue signals provided from several
measurement points in the NORMARC 70xxB equipment. The analogue multiplexers are
connected to the same address bus with separate enable bits. This allows the analogue
inputs to be measured separately as single ended signals, or to be paired for differential
measurements.
AURAL IDENT
The Aural ident block contains an analogue MUX, an amplifier and a loudspeaker. It ena-
bles the user to listen to the ident morse code from each of the four transmitters. The Det.
ident inputs are detected CSB signal, filtered through a 1020Hz bandpass filter.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
MEMORY
The memory block contains RAM for data storage, EPROM for the program and EEPROM
for permanent system setup parameters. The RAM has battery backup in order to retain
logging data during a power down.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.11 CI 1210A External Connection Interface
The CI 1210A External Connection Interface board provides all the interfaces for the NOR-
MARC 70xxB equipment for external connections except from RF signals and power sup-
ply.
The module performs transient overload protection on all inputs. In addition CI 1210A
contains a battery protection circuit and a modem demodulation circuit.
The external connections are:

• 1 Remote control port (FSK and opt. RS 232)
• 3 RS232 ports (local and remote RMM)
• 4 DC-loops (antenna cable fault detection)
• 1 DME (keying synchronisation)
• 2 Temperature sensors (indoor/outdoor)
• 1 AC-level measurement input
• 3 Differential Analogue inputs
• 8 Auxiliary Digital Inputs/Outputs

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Block Diagram:
+5V -15 V +15 V
Connection Interface Mux contol
CI1210A
Batt warning 1
Batt warning 2
Batt warning 2
Temp indoor
Temp outdoor
Temp indoor
AC level Analog Mux Analog out
Temp outdoor
Anl. In 1
AC level
Anl. In 2
Anl. In 1
Anl. In 3
Anl. In 2
Anl. In 3
User dig 0 User dig 0

IIC interface IIC bus
Local PC RS232
Over Voltage
Protection
Remote 1 PC RS232 Remote 1 RS232
Remote 2 PC RS232 Remote 2 RS232
Remote Control RS232

Modem & config
Remote
Remote Control FSK
Control FSK
Ident IN from DME

Ident OUT to DME DME config
DME Active from DME
DC loop 1 ref
DC loop 1 detect
4 * DC loop detect
DC loop 2 ref
DC loop 2 detect
DC loop 3 ref
DC loop 3 detect 4 * DC loop ref
DC loop 4 ref
DC loop 4 detect
Charger Amp Cabinet
Voltage
ref.
Battery Amp
HBK 1301-1
Figure 8-13 CI 1210A Block Diagram

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.12 BW 1566A Battery Warning (Hot Standby only)
The BW 1566A is used in hot standby equipment with dual battery banks to provide the
following features:
• Battery protection for the additional battery bank
• Voltage and current measurements for the additional battery bank
• Low battery warning for both battery banks
• Modem power
The BW 1566 has the same battery protection functionality as the CI 1210 board located
in the equipment and which is monitoring the first battery/Charger bank. Circuit descrip-
tion is therefore as for CI 1210 described in Section 8.1.11.
+5V -15 V +15 V
Battery Warning
BW1566A
Modem
power
Batt 1
Cabinet Pwr 1 Comparator low voltage
warning
Batt 2
Comparator low voltage
warning
Charger 2 current
Battery 2 current
Charger 2 Amp Cabinet Pwr 2
Voltage
ref.
Battery 2 Amp
HBK 1304-1
Figure 8-14 BW 1566A Block Diagram

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.12.1 Battery Protection
The module will disconnect the battery if the battery voltage falls below a preset voltage,
normally 22VDC. The trigger voltage can be adjusted between 20V and 24V by adjusting
R22.
8.1.12.2 Low battery detector and logic
The module contains circuits to give warnings when the battery voltages are falling below
a predetermined adjustable level, normally set to 23VDC, or optionally, if a battery is iso-
lated by the battery fuse (detected by the auxiliary switch connected to the battery circuit
breaker). Separate warning circuits are provided for each battery bank.
The battery low trigger voltage can be adjusted between 20V and 24V by adjusting R101
for battery bank #1 and R1 for battery bank #2
Separate signals for Battery #1 low, Battery #1 isolated, Battery #2 low, Battery #2 iso-
lated is provided for connection to the Digital inputs of the RMS system in the LLZ / GP
racks.
8.1.12.3 Modem Power
The module also provides fused power output J7 to modem or other external equipment.
Using diodes this output is supplied from both charger/Battery banks and these diodes
also prevent a reverse current from one battery bank to the other.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.1.13 MB 1575A Monitor Section Motherboard
Description:
MB 1575A is the backplane for the 19” subrack in the NORMARC 70xxB cabinet. MB 1575A
is a passive motherboard that provides all interconnections between the printed circuit
board in this subrack and all interface for external signals except from RF (Coax) cabling.
Table 8-1 shows the plug-in module connectors.
Section # Module
Monitor 1 1 MO 1212A
1 MF 1211A
1 External Frontend 1
Monitor 2 1 MO 1212A
1 MF 1211A
1 External Frontend 2
Standby Monitor 1 MO 1212A
1 MF 1211A
Station Control 1 TCA 1218A
RMS 1 RMA 1215A
Transmitter 1 1 LF 1576A
1 OS 1221 A/B
Transmitter 2 1 LF 1576A
1 OS 1221A/B
Power Supply 2 PS 1227C
Table 8-1 MB 1575A plug-in module connectors

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.2 Tower Equipment
The following paragraphs describe the modules to be located in the control tower.
8.2.1 RCA 1240 Remote Control Assembly
The RCA 1240C Remote Control Assembly consists of the remote control RC 1241B and
front panel RF 1242A.
The RCA 1240D Remote Control Assembly consists of the remote control RC 1241B and
front panel RF 1242B.
RCA 1240C is used for cold standby equipment and RCA 1240D is used for hot standby
equipment.
They provide the user’s interface to the ILS Cabinet from the control tower or technical
equipment room. The RCA 1240 is connected to the ILS cabinet either using ordinary tele-
phone lines or using the RS 232 interface selected by jumper plugs on the RC 1241B.
The telephone line interface conforms to V.21 standard (300 baud FSK) for use with ordi-
nary 2-wire 600 ohm telephone line. The transmitter level is -10 dBm, and the receivers
dynamic range is from -10 dBm to -34 dBm.
Most of the functionality of the remote control is provided by the FPGA NMP128A
described in Section 8.2.1.1
Block Diagram:
RC1241B
OPTO OUTPUTS
Telephone
line Line
driver/modem LED OUTPUTS RF1242A/B
Interface Signal Front panel
RS232 select
STATUS drivers LEDs
RS232
driver &
config ALARM
Control
and
uarts
RST_RC_AURAL_ONLY
RF1242A/B
Keys and KEYBOARD INPUTS RST_SL_AURAL_ONLY
switches
CONTROL INPUTS
AUX_IN AUX_OUT
SLAVE
LED
OUTPUTS
SLAVE DIRECT
INPUTS
HBK546-3 SLAVE DIRECT BUS
Figure 8-15 Block Diagram RCA 1240

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Block schematic signal description:
CONTROL INPUTS ILS control signals. Consists of INTERLOCK and TX_OFF.

OPTO OUTPUTS Opto coupler outputs. Collector/emitter for ALARM, NORMAL, WARNING
and STB_ALARM.
SLAVE_DIRECT_BUS Data interface to optional slave panel. Consists of open collector outputs
(ALARM, NORMAL, WARNING, STB_ALARM and SLAVE_BUZZER) and
active low inputs (ON_OFF, CHANGEOVER and SILENCE).
Block Description:
CONTROL AND UARTS
This block interprets serial data from the ILS cabinet and generates status outputs to front
panel LEDs, slave panel outputs, opto outputs and buzzer signal based on the received
status. Failure in data from ILS results in alarm condition. Discrete inputs from the front
panel keyboard, control/AUX inputs and slave panel (Section 8.2.5) are collected and sent
to the ILS rack as serial data.
INTERFACE SELECT
These straps select between telephone line and RS 232 for interface with the ILS cabinet.
The default setting is line interface.
LINE DRIVER/MODEM
This block converts logic level serial signals to and from FSK level line signals.
RS 232 DRIVER
This block converts logic level serial signals to and from RS 232 level signals.
SIGNAL DRIVERS
This block drives the front panel LEDs, opto outputs and slave panel LEDs.
FRONT PANEL LEDs
This block contains the front panel LEDs used to indicate the operational status of the ILS.
KEYS AND SWITCHES
This block contains the pushbuttons and switches used for operator input.

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.2.1.1 NMP128A Remote Control
NMP128A is a FPGA providing most of the remote control functions. NMP128A is based on
the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
ON_OFF_KEY
CHANGEOVER_KEY ON_OFF
SLAVE_ON_OFF_KEY Command CHANGEOVER
SLAVE_CHANGEOVER_KEY mixer
TX
SERIAL
uart
DATA
OUT
AUX_IN
INTERLOCK
ACCESS_GRANT_SWITCH
TX_OFF
RC_BUS
MESSAGE DATA
MESSAGE DATA LED OUTPUTS
RX Message
CARRIER PARITY ERROR
SERIAL uart detector
DETECT
DATA LED SLAVE LEDS
IN &
buzzer AUX_OUT
NEW MESSAGE
filter
MESSAGE
ALARM BUZZER
TIMEOUT
New message
timer SLAVE BUZZER
SILENCE_KEY
SLAVE_SILENCE_KEY
RST_RC_AURAL_ONLY
Figure 8-16 Block Diagram NMP128A
Block Description:
COMMAND MIXER
This block mixes the on/off and changeover commands from the different sources (remote
control front panel or slave front panel input).
TX UART
Converts parallel data to 2-bytes serial messages. The protocol is start bit, 8 data bits, 1
stop bit, odd parity.
RX UART
Converts serial data from remote control to parallel data (2 bytes).

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
MESSAGE DETECTOR
Messages are accepted only if two equal messages are received in sequence. If so, the
data output is updated and a new-message pulse is asserted.
NEW MESSAGE TIMER
Checks that an OK message and carrier detect is present. Missing message or no carrier
detect for 2 seconds or more gives timeout.
LED & BUZZER FILTER
Data from the ILS cabinet is filtered according to the following descriptions:
• Missing data from ILS sets an alarm condition (Alarm LED on, all other off).
• Activating SILENCE-key turns on all LED’s (lamptest).
• Interlock turns off all LEDs.
Buzzers are activated at transitions from normal to alarm. Lamptest always activates
buzzers. Pressing SILENCE-key deactivates the local buzzer. The remote control SILENCE-
key may deactivate the slave panel buzzer, while SILENCE from the slave panel may deac-
tivate the local buzzer (both separately configurable).
8.2.2 MB 1346A Motherboard
MB 1346A is a motherboard for RCA 1240.
Interconnections
J1 Backplane connector for RCA 1240
J2 RS-232 interface for external line modems, radio modems or fibre

optic connections (alternative to P9 line connection).
P3 Parallel interface to slave panel or status unit.
P4,P5 Power supply connectors
P6 Aux in/out signals. May be used for FFM status, intruder alarm or
other auxiliary functions
P7 Opto coupler outputs for ALARM, NORMAL, WARNING and STB.

ALARM.
P8 Interlock connector (alternative connector located on slave panel)
P9 RC telephone line interface. Includes alarm output and off input to

establish automatic shutdown of GP when LLZ is off.
NOTE
When MB 1346A is used with RCA 1240 and Interlock function is not used (connected), a
jumper plug must be installed in P8 (or P2 on SF 1344A on Slave Panel).

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.2.3 PS 635B Power Supply
Description:
PS 635B is based on a switch-mode DC/DC converter module (PKA 2212) that features
shutdown at low input voltage and current limiting of outputs (short circuit proof). Supply
inputs are protected by a fuses.
8.2.4 MB 1347A Motherboard
Description:
MB 1247A motherboard provides the interface to PS 635B power supply (Section 8.2.3)
through connectors for 24VDC input and 5VDC output.
8.2.5 SF 1344A / SP 1394A Slave Panel
Description:
The SF 1344A and SF 1394A slave panel provide user interfaces to the ILS from the con-
trol tower or equipment room. The slave panels are connected to the RCA 1240 remote
control assembly (Section 8.2.1) handling the interface with the ILS cabinet. SF 1344A
and SF 1394A are identical apart from mechanical dimensions.
FRONT PANEL LEDs
LEDs on the front panel indicate the ILS status (Alarm/Warning/Normal)
BUZZER
The internal buzzer provides aural alarms.
PUSHBUTTONS
Pushbutton switches provide the on/off and silence (aural alarm reset) function. The
silence button is also used for lamp test.
INTERLOCK CONNECTOR
A connector is provided for interfacing a IL 1379/IL 1380 interlock switch (Section 8.2.6).

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
8.2.6 IL 1379 / IL 1380 Interlock switch
Description:
The interlock switch is used if the runway has two ILS’s for opposite runway directions that
shall be interlocked.
The interlock switch consists of a key-operated change-over switch, and is connected to

the RCA 1240 remote control (Section 8.2.1) or SF 1344A/SF 1394A slave panels (Section
8.2.5) of the affected localizer and glide path equipment.
IL 1379 and IL 1380 are identical modules apart from mechanical dimensions.
The IL 1379 is 3 height units by 10 length units (approx. 12,8x5cm). The IL 1380 is 2
height units by 9 length units (approx. 8,4x4,5cm).
Figure 8-17 shows the Interlock switch connections.
INTERLOCK MB1346 / P8
SWITCH OR
SF1344 / P2
RWYA RWYB
1 INTERLOCK
2 GND
5 4 2 1
1 1
LLZ runway A LLZ runway B
2 2
1 1
GP runway A GP runway B
2 2
HBK838-1
Figure 8-17 Interlock switch connections

23137-I8/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
SECTION 11 APPENDIXES
Appendix A. Monitor and Maintenance Parameters
A.1 Monitor Parameters
These are ILS parameters measured by the monitors. An alarm on any of these parame-
ters can be configured to cause change-over/shut-down.
Channel Parameter Description

CL DDM Course Line - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Course Line - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Course Line - RF level
DS DDM Displacement Sensitivity - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Displacement Sensitivity - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Displacement Sensitivity - RF level
NF DDM Near Field - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Near Field - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Near Field - RF level
CLR DDM Clearance - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Clearance - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Clearance - RF level
- DF Difference Frequency
IDENT CL ACT IDENT activity signal from CL monitor (LLZ only)
CLR ACT IDENT activity signal from CLR monitor (LLZ only)
CLID MOD IDENT signal modulation on CL monitor (LLZ only)
CLR ID MOD IDENT signal modulation on CLR monitor (LLZ only)
TEST DDM Monitor self test signal
SDM Monitor self test signal
RF Monitor self test signal
SELF TEST Monitor self test signal from TX control (derived from monitor self test
parameters)
DC LOOP DC LOOP 0 DC-LOOP for antenna element group 0 (LLZ only)
DC LOOP 1 DC-LOOP for antenna element group 1 (LLZ only)
FFM DDM Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A DDM
(only with SDM Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A SDM
FC 1391) RF Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A RF
DDM Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B DDM
SDM Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B SDM
RF Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B RF
Execute Alarm Select Non-Exec / Exec alarm
Table A-1 Monitor Alarm/Warning Parameters

23137-IAPA/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page A-1
A.2 Maintenance Parameters
These parameters may cause maintenance warning and can be used for fault isolation
purposes.
Originates Parameter Gives WARNING when

from module (with default warning limits setting):
MO 1212 +5V OK +5V Supply Voltage below predefined limit.
STS ACT ADC conversion error
DSP PFO DSP power failure
DSP ERROR DSP watchdog warning.
DIAG RST Not used
SYNC ERROR COMPARATOR out of sync
+15V OK +15V Supply Voltage below predefined limit.
-15V OK -15V Supply Voltage below predefined limit.
MF 1211/ CL RF LEVEL RF level from CL monitor channel below predefined limit.
MF 1219
CL BASEBAND Baseband level from CL monitor channel below predefined limit.
DS RF LEVEL RF level from DS monitor channel below predefined limit.
DS BASEBAND Baseband level from DS monitor channel below predefined limit.
NF RF LEVEL RF level from NF monitor channel below predefined limit.
NF BASEBAND Baseband level from NF monitor channel below predefined limit.
CLR RF LEVEL RF level from CLR monitor channel below predefined limit.
CLR BASEBAND Baseband level from CLR monitor channel below predefined limit.
LF 1576 -15 V OK -15 V supply voltage status.
+15 V OK +15 V supply voltage status.
+2.5 V OK +2.5 V supply voltage status.
Watchdog Watchdog status. This signal is set to 1 if the watchdog has reset the
DSP.
DSP execution DSP software execution status. This signal is set to 0 if the DSP
does not access the FPGA.
DSP memory check DSP memory status. This signal is set to 1 by the DSP software if it
detects any failure in the external flash program memory or the inter-
nal RAM.
EEPROM parity Parity check status of the configuration data EEPROM. This signal is
set to 1 by the DSP software if a parity error is detected in any of the
configuration settings.
OS 1221 COURSE OUTPUT RF level output to COURSE transmitter is below a predefined level
LEVEL
COU TUNEVOLT COURSE tune voltage outside predefined limits.
COURSE SYNTH Synthesizer has been out of lock since COURSE transmitter was
LOCK WARN turned on.
COURSE LOCK COURSE synthesizer is out of lock
DETECT
CLR OUTPUT LEVEL RF level output to CLR transmitter is below a predefined level
CLR TUNEVOLT CLR tune voltage outside predefined limits.
CLR SYNTH LOCK Synthesizer has been out of lock since CLR transmitter was turned
WARN on.
CLR LOCK DETECT CLR synthesizer is out of lock
Table A-2 Maintenance Parameters (Part 1)

23137-IAPA/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Page A-2 ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
Originates from Parameter Description

module
TX LPA/GPA +5 V OK +5 V supply voltage status.
+27 V CSB Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the CSB power
amplifier stage.
+27 V SBO Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the SBO power
amplifier stage (not applicable for clearance transmitters in GP
equipment).
-15 V OK -15 V supply voltage status.
CSB forward power Measurement of the forward power on the CSB output.
CSB reverse power Measurement of the reverse power on the CSB output.
SBO forward power Measurement of the forward power on the SBO output.
SBO reverse power Measurement of the reverse power on the SBO output.
CSB I-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB I modulator
CSB Q-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB Q modulator
SBO I-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO I modulator
SBO Q-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO Q modulator
Temperature Measurement of the temperature of the power amplifier assembly
in degrees Celcius.
RMA 1215 RMS +5V Measured value of +5V voltage
RMS BATTERY Measured value of RMS battery voltage
PS 1227 PS1 -15V Measured value of -15V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS2 -15V Measured value of -15V supply voltage from PS1227 #2
PS1 +5V Measured value of +5V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS1 +8.5V Measured value of +8.5V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS2 +8.5V Measured value of +8.5V supply voltage from PS1227 #2
TX1 CLR I SBO Measured value of current through TX1 CLR SBO amplifier
TX1 CLR I CSB Measured value of current through TX1 CLR CSB amplifier
TX1 COURSE I SBO Measured value of current through TX1 COURSE SBO amplifier
TX1 COURSE I CSB Measured value of current through TX1 COURSE CSB amplifier
TX2 CLR I SBO Measured value of current through TX2 CLR SBO amplifier
TX2 CLR I CSB Measured value of current through TX2 CLR CSB amplifier
TX2 COURSE ISBO Measured value of current through TX2 COURSE SBO amplifier
TX2 COURSE I CSB Measured value of current through TX2 COURSE CSB amplifier
CI 1210 CHARGER STATUS1 Charger 1 Voltage OK / not OK
CHARGER STATUS2 Charger 2 Voltage OK / not OK
BATT CURRENT 1 Measured value of battery current (negative if charging)
POWER CURRENT 1 Measured value of total system current consumption
BW 1566 BATT CURRENT 2 Measured value of battery current (negative if charging)
(HOT STB ONLY) POWER CURRENT 2 Measured value of total system current consumption
Table A-3 Maintenance Parameters (Part 2)

23137-IAPA/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page A-3

module
CI 1210 Temp in Inside temperature (if installed)
Temp out Outside temperature (if installed)
AC voltage Mains voltage (if installed)
User defined 3 user defined analog inputs
Table A-4 User Defined Analog Inputs Maintenance Parameters

module
CI 1210 User defined 8 user defined logical inputs/outputs
Table A-5 User Defined Logical Inputs/Outputs Maintenance Parameters

23137-IAPA/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Page A-4 ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
Appendix B. Far Field Monitor

This chapter only applies to Localizer installations with the Far Field Monitor option
installed.

23137-IAPB/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page B-1

23137-IAPB/Rev.1/18-Mar-04
Page B-2 ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
Appendix C. Power Supply

Suppliers’ Documentation:
Powec SC8 or Eltek SMPS 700.

23137-IAPC/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page C-1

23137-IAPC/Rev.2/18-Mar-04
Page C-2 ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
3 RZHU 6XSSO\
,QVWDOODWLRQ*XLGH
$UWQR (OWHN
,VVXH2FWREHU
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment
on the part of AS ELTEK.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means— electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying and recording— for any purpose without the explicit written
permission of AS ELTEK.
Copyright ©: AS ELTEK, Norway 1998
NS-ISO 9001 Certificate No.4
This product holds a CE mark and satisfies all requirements covering relevant standards and
directives.
(0& /9'
â LVD73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
*HQHULF,PPXQLW\6WDQGDUG
â EN50082-1 Residential, Commercial and Light Industry
â EN50082-2 Industrial Environment
*HQHULF(PLVVLRQ6WDQGDUG
â EN50081-1 Residential, Commercial and Light Industry
â EN50081-2 Industrial Environment
Main Office:
$6(/7(.
P.O. Box 1500
N-3007 DRAMMEN
Norway
Phone: 47 32203200
Fax: 47 32203210
E-Mail (Sales Dept.): sale@eltek.no
E-Mail (Service Dept.): service@eltek.no
E-Mail (Project Dept.): project@eltek.no
E-Mail (Purchasing Dept.): purchasing@eltek.no
E-Mail (Engineering Dept.): engineering@eltek.no
E-Mail (Product Dept.): product@eltek.no
E-Mail (Tech. Production Dept.): pta@eltek.no
E-Mail (Development Dept.): utvikling@eltek.no
E-Mail (all departments): eltek@eltek.no
Visit our Web site on Internet: http://www.eltek.no
,VVXH2FWREHU
This document was produced using Microsoft Word.
aari/stha 97.10.27_4029033.doc.T-36000-B4
Cover:
SMPS 700 SI WALLBOX has art. no. 241113.340, 21113.320, 21113.310
Installation Guide 60366,:$//%2;

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
2
Contents
&RQWHQWV
*HQHUDO
,QVWDOODWLRQ
(OHFWULFDO,QVWDOODWLRQ
2SHUDWLRQ
Visual indications 6
Adjustments 7
(OHFWULFDO0HFKDQLFDO'DWD
,QSXW
2XWSXW
0HFKDQLFDO'DWD
Temperature range 11
Humidity 11
Acoustic noise 11
General 12
Interface 12
6\VWHPGUDZLQJV

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
3
Contents

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
4
General
*HQHUDO
The Eltek range of wall mounted switch mode power supply has been specifically
developed to meet the DC powering requirements for the telecommunications,
industrial and marine industries
The SMPS 700 SI Wallbox has the following features:
• High efficiency
• Power Factor Correction
• Low weight and volume
• Soft Start
• 12Volt, 24Volt and 48Volt options
• Boost charging
• Output Power Limiting
• Automatic Over Temperature De-Rating
• Alarm and Control Facilities
• Compliant with International Standards including Marine Applications
The SMPS 700 SI Wallbox can be used for both portable and stationary equipment
either as a power supply or battery charger.
:DUQLQJ
This product has no user serviceable parts inside. There are Hazardous Voltages
inside during operation! Do not expose unit to moisture, water, dust or other items
that may result in short-circuits or fire. Do not block the airflow through or around
the module.
Removal of cover should be done by authorised service persons only. Wait for 10
minutes after disconnection before removing cover to ensure all high voltages has
been discharged to a safe level.
⇒ The SMPS 700 Wallbox must be mounted vertically only.
,QVWDOODWLRQ
Please check that the equipment is not damaged and is in accordance with your
order. Compare the barcode labels on the module and the package - they should be
identical. Check input and output voltages against your system voltage levels.
Remove front plastic cover by releasing the four screws in front of SMPS700
Wallbox.
⇒7KHPHWDOFRYHULQVLGHWKH6036:DOOER[PXVW127EHUHPRYHG

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
5
General
Use «Dimension drawing» (annexe, dwg: T35957-M3) as a guideline for mounting

holes. The two upper fixing screws must be mounted first. Then the SMPS700
Wallbox must be hooked on, and the two lower fixing screws must be mounted.
The SMPS 700 Wallbox is now ready for electrical connections.
(OHFWULFDO,QVWDOODWLRQ
See «Connection drawing» (annexe, dwg: T35963-N3).
All connections have to be done from bottom of rectifier. Front plastic cover must
be removed before connections.
Max. Cable size: -Mains input: 2.5mm2.
-Low voltage disconnection: 2.5mm2.
-Boost connection: 2.5mm2.
-Alarm connection: 2.5mm2.
-Output voltage: 10.0mm2.
1RWH The Alarm relay connections are labelled «Alarm = open» and «Alarm =
closed». This means that when an alarm situation occur, there will be electrical
short circuit between connector J3: 5 (Alarm = closed) and J3: 6 (Common). When
there is no alarm situation, there will be no electrical connection between those two
terminals. Alarm = open means the opposite.
1RWHRQO\ZKHQERRVWYROWDJHLVUHTXLUHG Boost voltage connections must be
done with an external timer relay. The terminals «NO» (normally open) and «C»
(common) at the external timer relay must be connected as the connection drawing
is showing.
2SHUDWLRQ
The SMPS 700 SI Wallbox is intended for use as a stand-alone module with an
alarm contact for remote sense of the SMPS 700 Wallbox, and visible LED’s in
front.
9LVXDOLQGLFDWLRQV
Front yellow LED: «POWER» - indicates operating module.
Front yellow LED: «CURRENT» - indicates that output current is displayed.
Front yellow LED: «VOLTAGE» - indicates that output voltage is displayed.
Front red LED: «RECT.ERROR» - indicates an error state. The Alarm
relay will change into passive (deenergized) state
simultaneously, and the module is in shutdown mode.
art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
6
General
Front red LED: «LOAD FUSE» - indicates that the DC output fuse (see
connection drawing) is in OFF -position.
Front red LED: «LOW BATTERY» - indicates that the DC output voltage
is below a specified limit. This limit can be adjusted, see
connection drawing.
Front red LED: «HIGH BATTERY» - indicates that the DC output
voltage is above a specified limit. This limit can be
adjusted, see connection drawing.
$GMXVWPHQWV
Connection drawing (annexe, dwg: T35963-N3) shows available adjustments. All
potentiometers are factory adjusted and should only be operated by qualified
service personnel.
Level adjustments:
241113.340 241113.320 241113.310

48V-version: 24V-version: 12V-version:
Adjustable Factory Adjustable: Factory Adjustable: Factory
settings: settings: settings:
Output voltage [V]: 40.0-59.5 53.5 20.0-29.5 26.8 10.0-29.5 13.4
*Overvoltage
protection level [V]
56.0-60.0 60.0 26.0-30.0 30.0 26.0-30.0 30.0
*Current limit [A]: 5.0-15.0 14.0 20.0-29.5 25.0 20.0-29.5 29.0
High battery
voltage level [V]:
54.0-60.0 56.0 24.0-30.0 28.0 12.0-30.0 14.0
Low battery voltage
level [V]:
45.0-55.0 50.0 22.5-27.0 25.0 10.0-13.0 12.5
Low voltage
disconnect [V]:
40.0-53.0 43.0 20.0-26.0 21.5 10.7-13.0 10.8
*: Only authorised personnel must change this setting.
Table 1: Level adjustments.
([DPSOH$GMXVWLQJKLJKEDWWHU\YROWDJHOHYHO
Note!: The levels marked: *, must only be changed by authorised personnel.
Ref.: Connection Drawing (annexe).
Say, we want to change the high battery voltage alarm level from 28.0V to 28.5V
at the SMPS 700 Wallbox, 24V-version.
1. Press right button at the front of the SMPS 700 Wallbox so that the display is
showing output voltage.
art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
7
General
2. Remove plastic front cover.

3. Disconnect external loads and batteries.
4. Adjust DC-output voltage potentiometer with a screwdriver (clockwise) so that
the display is showing 28.5V (the High Battery Alarm led will lightening up).
5. Adjust High battery voltage alarm potentiometer with a screwdriver until the
High Battery Alarm (H.B.A) LED turns off. Turn the screwdriver backwards
carefully just until the H.B.A LED is lightening up, not more. The H.B.A -level
is now set to 28.5 V.
6. Adjust DC-output voltage potentiometer counter clockwise so that the display
is showing 26.8V.
7. Connect loads and batteries.
8. Put on the plastic cover.

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
8
Electrical / Mechanical Data
(OHFWULFDO0HFKDQLFDO'DWD
,QSXW
• 9ROWDJH 230VAC nominal ± 20% (total range: 185VAC - 275VAC).
High voltage: 275 - 300 VAC for < 10 minutes (reduced power factor, increased
harmonic current).
• In the input voltage range 100.0 - 185.0 the SMPS 700 Wallbox reduces the
output power to app. 40 - 50% of full power. For instance; the 24V-version has
an output current > 10A with nominal voltage 26.8VDC and input voltage equal
to 100VAC!
• )UHTXHQF\ 50 Hz or 60 Hz nominal ±10% (total range: 45 - 66 Hz).
Frequency deviation: 35 Hz to 100 Hz for < 10 minutes (reduced PF, increased
harmonics).
• ,QSXWFXUUHQW3.2 ARMS at 230 VAC , 4.2 ARMS maximum at 185VAC - full
load. Harmonic currents according to IEC555-2. Current THD: < 7% at full
load.
• 3RZHUIDFWRU Approx. 0.995 at full load, 230VAC +20%/–10% input
• (IILFLHQF\>90.5% typical at 230VAC, nominal output voltage and full load.
>80% at 20% load
• ,QSXWIXVH F 5.0A (H) (fast, high rupture capacity) (5*20mm) in Live input.
Disconnect mains for fuse replacement, see Connection Drawing.
• ,QUXVKFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ <8A followed by converter soft-start
2XWSXW
2XWSXWYROWDJH
• 2XWSXWYROWDJH See table 1.
• 2YHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQOHYHO: See table 1.
• 9ROWDJHUHJXODWLRQ Static: ± 0.5 % for load 100%-0% and input 185 - 275VAC
Dynamic response: ±5.0% - regulation time <10ms - load step 10-90% or
opposite
• 7HPSHUDWXUHGULIW ± 100 ppm / °K over temperature range
• +ROGXSWLPH >10ms at 53.5V output, full load.
• %RRVW9ROWDJH Uboost nominal + 1,5 ± 0,5 VDC.

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
9
2XWSXWSRZHU
• 9YHUVLRQ: Constant power from 43.0 to 58.0 VDC : 670W +20W - 40W
(range: 630W - 690W) Output power at 53.5VDC : 670W ±20 (nominal output
voltage).
• 9YHUVLRQ: Constant power from 22.0 to 29.5 VDC : 670W +20W - 40W
(range: 630W - 690W) Output power at 26.8VDC : 670W ±20W (nominal
output voltage).
• 9YHUVLRQ: Constant output current from 10.5 to 22.0VDC: 29.0 ± 0.3 A.
Output power at nominal output voltage: 390 ± 10 W.
2XWSXWFXUUHQW
• 6KRUWFLUFXLWEHKDYLRXU (0 VDC < VOUT < 5VDC ): Current limit.
• 5LSSOHDQGQRLVH: < 100 mV peak-to-peak, < 2-mV psophometric.
• There is an automatic circuit breaker (40A) at the output for reverse polarity
protection.
• Reverse current at DC output: Max. 20 mA (from battery)
(OHFWURPDJQHWLFLQWHUIHUHQFH
(PLVVLRQ
5DGLDWHG EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
E10 marine specification - includes: IEC
801-3 Radiated electromagnetic field
&RQGXFWHG,QSXW EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
VDE 0871 grade B
&RQGXFWHG 2XWSXW EN 50081-2
VDE 0871 grade A
,PPXQLW\
EN 50082-1
EN 50082-2
E10 marine specification includes:
IEC80(secr)51(1990) Conducted audio
interference immunity.

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
10
6DIHW\
'HVLJQVWDQGDUG
• IEC 950 (EN60950) - classification of equipment:
• Protection class: 1 (permanent connection to protective earth).
• Supply connection: Permanent (may be connectable)
• Clearance and creepage class: Pollution degree 2, Material group 2 (3a for
circuit boards).
• An external primary circuit breaker must be used in the input line.
• IEC protection class: IP22. Current from AC inputs to safety earth: < 10mA at
50Hz.
,VRODWLRQYROWDJHV
• Input - earth: 1.5 kVAC (basic insulation).
• Input - output: 3.0 kVAC (reinforced insulation)
• Output - earth: 1.0 kVDC (basic insulation - SELV according to IEC950)
E10 marine specification -includes: Insulation resistance.
0HFKDQLFDO'DWD
• Width: 272 mm , Height: 370 mm, Depth: 135 mm
• Weight: < 3.5 kg
(QYLURQPHQW
7HPSHUDWXUHUDQJH
• 6WRUDJH –25°C to +85°C.
• 2SHUDWLRQ –10°C to +55°C. The module may enter thermal protection mode
above 45°C under extreme conditions (power limit, low mains).
+XPLGLW\
• 6WRUDJH 0-95% Relative Humidity non-condensing
• 2SHUDWLQJ 10% - 85% RH non-condensing
$FRXVWLFQRLVH
<40 dB (A) max (30 dB typ.) according to IEC651 at normal line and load.

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
11
*HQHUDO
• Internal protection by shutdown is provided for output overvoltage (when
delivered by the module itself), over temperature and low mains. For over -
temperature, current limit is reduced. If temperature increases further, shutdown
and alarm is given.
• Module MTBF according to MIL-HDBK 217F.1 parts count: > 100 000 hours.
,QWHUIDFH
• Alarm contacts: 125VDC, 1A max floating. Configuration Alarm = open,
Alarm = closed and Common are available.
• Low voltage disconnect max. ratings, external relay:
Output voltage: Approximate nominal rectifier output
DC-voltage.
Output current: 1.2 ADC max.

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
12
System drawings
6\VWHPGUDZLQJV

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
13
System drawings

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
14
System drawings

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
15
System drawings

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
16
System drawings

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
17
System drawings

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
18
System drawings

art.no. 354029.033 , v2, October 1997
19
Appendix D. Windows RMM Program

23137-IAPD/Rev.5/18-Mar-04
©2004 Park Air Systems AS Page D-1

23137-IAPD/Rev.5/18-Mar-04
Page D-2 ©2004 Park Air Systems AS
Commercial – in - Confidence
D USER'S GUIDE
D.1 OVERVIEW OF THE NORMARC 7000 RMM
This information has been updated for version 2.2 of the software.
The NORMARC® 7000 RMM is a Microsoft Windows based program that provides access
to all the data and functions made available by the ILS remote monitoring subsystem.
By connecting to the ILS remote monitoring subsystem, the program lets the user do
the following:
• View the current status and measurements done by the ILS.
• Configure ILS monitor and transmitter settings.
• View reports that shows the current operational status and configuration of an ILS.
• Download historical data from the ILS and browse through individual data sets.
• Download and view events to see the operational history of the ILS.
• Connect to the ILS with a null modem cable (direct), dial-up connection or leased line
connection.
The figure below shows a screen dump of the main program window.
NORMARC 7000B OVERVIEW OF WINDOWS RMM

IMAPPD/Rev.5
© 2004 Park Air Systems AS Page 1 of 48
D.1.1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
To install the software, just insert the CDROM and wait until the NORMARC 7000 RMM
welcome file is displayed. Read the instructions in this file to install the software.
OVERVIEW OF WINDOWS RMM NORMARC 7000B

IMAPPD/Rev.5
Page 2 of 48 © 2004 Park Air Systems AS
D.2 GENERAL
D.2.1 THE STATION LIST
The RMM software maintains a list of ILS stations. The list contains information that is
used by the software to identify and to connect to an ILS.
When the menu item File | Connect to station is selected, the station list window is
opened:
The user can do the following from the Station list window:
• Connect to a station
• Add a new station
• Edit a station
• Delete a station.
Each of these operations are described below.
D.2.1.1 CONNECT TO A STATION
To connect to a station that has been set up in the station list, the station must first be
selected and then the "Connect" button clicked. The RMM software will connect to the
station, before the user is asked to log on to the ILS.
D.2.1.2 ADD A NEW STATION
This function adds a new station to the station list. The settings for the new station are
initialised with default values. The user must select "Edit station" to customize the
settings for the new station.
D.2.1.3 EDIT A STATION
To edit a station, select the desired station and click the "Edit station" button. The
following window will appear:

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The following information has to be set correctly:

Station name: Type in the desired name. The name may be up to 50 characters
long.
Port: Select the serial port on the PC that the connection shall use. The available
options are COM1 - COM16, plus SIM. Select SIM to connect to a simple ILS
simulator instead of an actual ILS. See the simulator description chapter for more
information.
Bitrate: Select the speed of the communication. The options are 2400, 4800 or
9600 bps. 9600 bps is the default bit rate.
Connect method: Select Direct (null-modem), Dial up or Leased line
connection. Direct connection is the default connects method.
Phone number: Type the phone number for the connection. This field is valid
only for Dial up connections.
Modem: Select the modem in the dropdown list that matches the actual modem
used. This affects the modem init strings that will be used for the connection
types (dial up or leased line). The user may also edit the modem settings by
clicking the Edit button.
Enable automatic download: Check this box to automatically download the
medium time periodic storage from the ILS at the time you specify. Note that the
storage will only be downloaded if a user is logged on to the ILS at the specified
time. Automatic medium time storage download will not be performed if another
storage download (excluding event download) is in progress at the specified
time.
D.2.1.4 DELETE A STATION
In order to delete a station, select the station and click the "Delete station" button. The
user is asked to confirm before the deletion takes place. Note that the delete operation
will also delete all historical data stored in the database for the selected station. This
may take a few seconds.
D.2.2 LOGGING ON AND OFF
After a connection has been established with an ILS the user must log on by entering
the user name and password(s).

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The top panel of the ILS Logon window displays dialling/connection progress, and when
the connection has been established it shows which to port on the ILS the user is
connected, in addition to the RMS software version of the ILS.
To log on the user must wait until the user name and password field becomes available
for input and then enter a valid user name and one or more passwords. The user name
and password(s) are not case sensitive.
The ILS will compare the entered username and password(s) with the information
stored in the RMS subsystem in the ILS. If invalid logon information is entered the RMS
subsystem in the ILS will not allow access. A window will be opened informing about
what went wrong, and let the user perform another logon attempt. If three attempts are
used without success the ILS will disconnect and not allow more login attempts for 3
minutes (Remote Port 1 and 2 only).
Refer to the Access levels chapter for related information.
For information about logging on the simulator see the Built-in Simulator chapter.
D.2.3 ACCESS LEVELS
The operations that are permitted to a logged on user depend on the logon access level.
The NORMARC 7000 ILS defines four access levels:
Access Number of Allowed operations
level passwords
Level 1 1 Readout of all measurements and all configuration data, except
user passwords.
Level 2 2 Level 1 operations + turning transmitters and LF signals on/off.
Level 3 3 Level 1 and 2 operations + setting all configuration data,
MASTER 3 Level 1, 2 and 3 operations + setting/viewing users and
passwords, setting the ILS real time clock.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, more than one password must be
entered. The passwords must be separated with a single space.
The user name and password(s) are not case sensitive.
To logon as MASTER, which is a special built-in administrative user, the user name
"master" and all three master passwords must be entered (logon at access levels 1 or 2
with the master user is therefore not possible). The factory default master passwords
are: MASTER1 MASTER2 MASTER3
To logon at other access levels a user account must be first be set up by the master
user.
If the master user passwords have been lost, the Customer Service department can help
with resetting the master passwords.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, straps on the TCA board must be set to
enable this. Refer to the NORMARC 7000 Technical Manual for more information about
this.
D.2.3.1 VIEWING REPORTS
When logged on to an ILS the user can view reports for the current ILS. The "View
report" window is opened by selecting the menu item File | View report.
There are two types of reports:

A report for documenting the operational status, monitor and maintenance
measurements, and selected configuration data. Note that all configuration data
is not included on the report, the report is therefore not a replacement for the
configuration files.
A report for listing all events that has occurred in a selected time period. The last
31 days are selected by default when the dialog is opened.
The reports are in HTML format and are automatically opened in the default Web-
browser (this will normally be Microsoft Internet Explorer) when the user clicks the OK
button. The user can print or save the report from the Web-browser.
D.2.4 PREFERENCES
User preferences can be selected in the File | Preferences window. These settings are
stored in the user portion of the Windows registry and will be restored each time the
program is started.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.2.4.1 UNIT FOR DDM VALUES
Selects the unit to use for DDM values. This controls the unit used for all DDM
value output (on the screen and printed report) and DDM value user input (for
example monitor limit adjustment). Note that the unit used for DDM values
stored in the database and in configuration or historical or continuous data log
files is always µA.
To change the unit for DDM values on the LCD of the cabinet refer to the NORMARC
7000 Operating Manual or the System options section.
D.2.4.2 ADJUSTMENT MODE OPTIONS
These options can be used to change the way the program displays measurements and
configuration settings. These options should be left un-checked when the program is
used for routine maintenance or monitoring.
High decimal precision: Check this to display values and limits with an extra
decimal.
Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type: Check this to
display all the defined ILS configuration parameters independent of the actual
ILS system configuration. This option should only be enabled for configuring new
monitor, rms or LF-generator boards at the factory. It can also be necessary to
enable this option when a board is moved from one equipment to another (for
example from a LLZ to a GP).
Enable alarm limit setting in level 3 from Test DDM window: Check this to display
buttons in the Test DDM window for changing the CL DDM and NF DDM monitor
limits. This option can be enabled for easy access to monitor limit setting during
commissioning flight-check. Note that some civil aviation authorities may prohibit
the use of this option.
NOTE: The user must manually close and re-open measurement and configuration
windows for the options to take effect when any Adjustment mode option has been
changed.
D.2.4.3 LANGUAGE
The language to use in the user interface can be selected in this drop-down list. The list
of available languages is created dynamically when the Preferences window is opened by
looking for resint_*.dll files in the installation folder. The resint_*.dll files contain the
translated strings that is used in the GUI and on the report.
NOTE: The program must be restarted for a change in the language setting to take
effect.
D.2.5 USING MODEMS
D.2.5.1 ABOUT USING MODEMS
The use of modems is required when connecting to an ILS over a public or private
telephone network. The connection can be either a dial-up connection or a leased line
connection. In both cases modems are connected to the PC and to an RS232 port on the
connection interface inside the ILS cabinet. Normally one of the REMOTE1 or REMOTE2
ports is used for this.
When the "Connect method" for a station is set to "Dial up" or "Leased line", the modem
connected to the PC will be initialised with AT command strings set up for the selected
modem. The user can add new modem configurations and customize the AT command
strings for existing modems.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
Procedures for using Westermo and USRobotics modems are described later in the
"Using modems" chapter.
When the user clicks the Edit button in the "Edit station" window the following window
will be opened:
This window lists the modems for which dial up and leased line initialisation strings have
been set up. The list will by default contain settings for a few supported modems. If the
modem that is to be used is not found in the list, the user can add a new modem to the
list by clicking the Add button. Click the Edit button to change the set up for the
currently selected modem. Selecting Add or Edit will open the window shown below.
In this window the user can type in the init strings for dialup and leased line connections
respectively. The init string is strings sent to the modem before the actual call is
started. These settings require knowledge about the AT commands that are supported
by the specific modem in question, and should only be altered by a user familiar with
modems. The technical manuals for the modems will normally contain the necessary
information on how to initialise the modem.
To delete a modem in the modem list, click the Delete button, and respond to the
confirmation dialog. Note that a modem cannot be deleted if it is selected for use by a
station.
D.2.5.2 DIAL-UP USING WESTERMO TD-32
This description applies to Westermo TD-32AC / TD-32DC modems.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.2.5.2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
In the tables below, 1 indicates that a DIP switch is ON, 0 indicates OFF.
SW1: 1 2 3 4 Description
ILS modem 0 0 0 1 Dial-up connection. All AT commands ignored,
* including +++
PC modem 1 0 0 0 Dial-up connection. Enable AT commands.
SW2: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description
ILS modem 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Enable SW2:2 to 7. Asynchronous.
DTR/DSR disconnected.
PC modem 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Enable SW2:2 to 7. Asynchronous.
DTR/DSR not disconnected.
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2-wire connection.
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps. 8 data bits. No stop bits.
ILS and PC 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Auto detect line parameters.
• - This is the DIP switch setting after the modem has been initialised.
D.2.5.2.2 INITIALISING THE ILS MODEM
The ILS modem must be initialised before connecting it to the cabinet. This is done by
connecting it to a standard PC that has communication or terminal software installed
(for example HyperTerminal in Windows).
1. Make sure SW1 position 4 is set to OFF (power off the modem if the switch needs
to be changed).
2. Connect the modem to a PC, and use for example HyperTerminal in Windows to
send the following init string to the modem: ATS0=1&C1&D2&W
3. Check that the modem responds with OK to the init string.
4. Power off the modem and set switch SW1 position 4 to ON (this makes the
modem ignore all AT-commands). Connect the modem to the cabinet as
described below and power on the modem.
D.2.5.2.3 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE CABINET.
The modem must be connected to Remote Port 1 or Remote Port 2 on the connection
interface board in the ILS cabinet. The bit rate for this port must be 9600 bps (this is
the default setting). There is no need to configure any modem init strings in the ILS.
It is recommended to use Remote Port 2 on the ILS, because this port has a 16 byte
FIFO that reduces the CPU load caused by the serial communication handling. RMS
version 12 or later should be installed when remote port 1 is used (earlier RMS versions
does not drive RTS active so this signal must be strapped to DSR on the modem side.)
Also note that the ILS does not drive DTR active on remote port 1, but the modem is set
up to ignore this signal.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.2.5.2.4 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE PC
The modem must be connected to a serial port between COM1 and COM16. The
"Connect method" in the RMM software must be set to "Dial up", the bit rate to 9600
bps and the init string should be:
ATX3&C1&D2\N5&W
D.2.5.3 DIAL-UP USING US ROBOTICS COURIER
Applies to USRobotics Courier Dual Standard V.34+ modems
D.2.5.3.1 CONFIGURING THE ILS MODEM
D.2.5.3.2 SET DIP SWITCHES ON THE ILS MODEM.
• Switch 1 must be set to the DTR ALWAYS ON position.

• Switch 4 must be set to the ON position - Do not echo off-line commands
• Switch 5 must be set to the AUTO ANSWER ON RING position.
• The remaining switches should be left in their factory default positions.
D.2.5.3.3 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE CABINET.
• The remote modem must be connected to Remote Port 2 on the connection interface
board in the ILS cabinet.
D.2.5.3.4 CONFIGURE ILS MODEM INIT STRING.
• With a PC running NM7000 RMM software, log in with MASTER access on the Local
Port.
• Select "Port setup" in the "General settings" window.
• Set the Remote port 2 modem configuration as follows (All ‘0’ letters are zeroes.):
AT&F1E0&D0&R1S0=1&W
D.2.5.3.5 INITIALISING THE ILS MODEM.
Press the «Send init» button in the ILS modem settings window to make the ILS send
the initialisation string on the port selected in the port list. Do this on remote port 2.
(The ILS will also send the these init strings each time the ILS is powered on.)
D.2.5.3.6 CONFIGURING THE PC MODEM
1. All modem DIP switches should be left in their factory default positions.
2. Configure the Station for this connection as follows:
• Bitrate 9600
• Connect method set to Dial up and modem init string: AT&F1 (Select modem
USRobotics).
The modem will automatically dial and connect to the remote ILS when the user selects
a connection with this channel.
D.2.5.4 LEASED LINE USING WESTERMO TD-32
This description applies to Westermo TD-32AC / TD-32DC modems.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.2.5.4.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
In the tables below, 1 indicates that a DIP switch is ON, 0 indicates OFF.
SW1: 1 2 3 4 Description
ILS modem 0 1 0 1 Leased line, switch off echo and result code. All AT
commands ignored, including +++
PC modem 1 1 0 1 Leased line, originate mode. All AT commands
ignored, including +++
ILS and PC 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Enable SW2:2 to 7. Asynchronous.
modem DTR/DSR disconnected.
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2-wire connection.
modem
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps. 8 data bits. No stop bits.
modem
ILS and PC 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 V.32 bis 9600 bps
D.2.5.4.2 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE CABINET
The modem must be connected to Remote Port 1 or Remote Port 2 on the connection
interface board in the ILS cabinet. The bit rate for this port must be 9600 bps (this is
the default setting). There is no need to configure any modem init strings in the ILS.
It is recommended to use Remote Port 2 on the ILS, because this port has a 16 byte
FIFO that reduces the CPU load caused by the serial communication handling. RMS
version 12 or later should be installed when remote port 1 is used (earlier RMS versions
does not drive RTS active so this signal must be strapped to DSR on the modem side.)
Also note that the ILS does not drive DTR active on remote port 1, therefore the modem
is set up to ignore this signal.
D.2.5.4.3 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE PC
The modem must be connected to a serial port between COM1 and COM16. The
"Connect method" in the RMM software must be set to "Direct", and the bit rate to 9600
bps. There is no need to configure any initialisation strings.
D.2.5.5 LEASED LINE USING US ROBOTICS COURIER
Applies to USRobotics Courier Dual Standard V.34+ modems.
D.2.5.5.1 CONFIGURING THE ILS MODEM
D.2.5.5.2 SET DIP SWITCHES ON THE ILS MODEM.
• Switch 1 must be set to the DTR ALWAYS ON position.

• Switch 4 must be set to the ON position - Do not echo off-line commands
• Switch 5 must be set to the AUTO ANSWER ON RING position.
• The remaining switches should be left in their factory default positions.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.2.5.5.3 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE CABINET
• The remote modem must be connected to Remote Port 2 on the connection interface
board in the ILS cabinet.
D.2.5.5.4 CONFIGURE ILS MODEM INIT STRING
• With a PC running NM7000 RMM software, log in with MASTER access on the Local
Port.
• Select the "Port setup" tab in the "General settings" window.
• Set the Remote port 2 modem configuration as follows (all ‘0’ letters are zeroes):
AT&F1E0&L1S0=1&W
D.2.5.5.5 INITIALISING THE ILS MODEM
• Clicking the «Init modem» button in the Port setup tab makes the ILS send the
initialisation string on the port selected in the port list.
• The ILS will also send these init strings when the ILS is powered on.
D.2.5.5.6 CONFIGURING THE LOCAL MODEM
All modem DIP switches should be left in their factory default positions.
Configure the «Port Setup» as follows:
• Bitrate 9600
• Connect method set to Leased line and modem init string: AT&F1&D0&L1D (the “0”
letter is zero) (Select modem USRobotics).
D.2.6 DATE AND TIME FORMATS
The RMM software uses the regional settings set up in the Windows Control Panel to
format dates shown on the screen and on printed reports. The format used is the "Short
Date" format. This will make the displayed dates match the convention used in the
user's country.
The time format is not retrieved from the regional settings. The 24-hour format
HH:MM:SS.S is used instead. This shows hours, minutes, seconds and tenths of
seconds.
In exported data (Continuous data logging) and in default filenames the date and time
format used is according to the international standard (ISO 8601), i.e. YYYY-MM-DD for
dates and HH:MM:SS.S for the time of day.
D.2.7 BUILT-IN SIMULATOR
This version of the RMM software has a built-in simulator that allows the user to operate
most functions of the software without being connected to a real ILS.
The simulator simulates only basic RMS functions. It is not guarantied that all operations
that are possible on an ILS will work on the simulator. The simulator does, for example,
not simulate feedback of transmitted ILS signals to the monitors. The measurements
and parameters are preset values, that are not necessarily logical correct. The simulator
always simulates a Two-freq. LLZ, Hot standby TX, w/FFM & Voice.
The simulator is automatically started if the user connects to a station which has "SIM"
selected as its port.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
Any user name and password(s) can be used for logging on the Simulator, as the
Simulator does not check these fields. But note that to log on as Master the user name
"master" must be used, and the number of passwords entered determines the access
level (as described in the Access levels chapter).
D.3 VIEWING ILS DATA

D.3.1 MONITOR MEASUREMENTS
Selecting the ILS-Data | Monitor menu item opens the monitor measurements
window, which is shown below. This window shows the executive monitor
measurements that are valid for the current ILS.
The individual measurements and groups are formatted with special characters and
colours according to the "measurement status" of each measurement.
Note that this window shows the defined monitor measurements for the current ILS,
unless the "Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type" option is
checked in the Preferences window.
D.3.2 MAINTENANCE MEASUREMENTS
Selecting the ILS-Data | Maintenance menu item opens the maintenance

measurements window, which is shown below. This window shows the "maintenance"
measurements that are valid for the current ILS.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The individual measurements and groups are formatted with special characters and
colours according to the "measurement status" of each measurement.
From this window it is also possible to toggle the state of digital user I/O ports that has
been configured as outputs. To toggle the output state double-click the text shown in
the Meas column.
Note that this window shows the defined maintenance measurements for the current
ILS, unless the "Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type" option
is checked in the Preferences window.
D.3.3 FRONT PANEL
The front panel shows the system status for the ILS cabinet. The front panel is opened
with the ILS-Data | Front panel menu item.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The front panel shows the same information as the physical front panel on the ILS.
The user must be logged on with Access level 2 or higher to be able operate the controls
in the window.
D.3.3.1 MONITOR INDICATORS
The "monitoring related" indicators are the following:

• SERVICE: Indicates that the ILS is under service. This may be caused by any of the
switches on the ILS is in service position.
• ALARM: Indicates that one or more of the monitor parameters in the ILS is in alarm
state.
• WARNING: Indicates that one or more of the sub-warning LEDs at the left side of the
front panels is activated, and the sub-warning is configured for generating main
WARNING.
• NORMAL: Indicates that there are no alarms present among the monitor parameters
in the ILS. This indicator will always be the opposite of the ALARM indicator.
Note that the ALARM, WARNING and NORMAL indicators for the STANDBY transmitter
are only visible if the ILS is configured for hot standby transmitter operation.
The sub-warning indicators are as following:
• PARAM: Indicates that one or more of the monitor parameters is in warning state.
Note: If the "Signal integrity test failure on Param LED" system option is enabled, the
label for this warning will be "INTGRT".
• DISAGR: Indicates that one of the two monitors detect an alarm while the other
monitor sees a normal signal.
• BATT: Indicates that the ILS is currently operating on battery.
• IDENT: Indicates that the IDENT is faulty. Valid for LLZ equipment only.
• MAINT: Indicates that one or more of the maintenance parameters are in warning
state. Note: If the "Signal integrity test failure on Param LED" system option is
enabled, this warning will also be activated if a monitor parameter is in warning
state.
• STBY: Indicates that the ILS is currently operating on the standby transmitter.
These sub-warnings may be configured to generate a main WARNING.
D.3.3.2 TRANSMITTER INDICATORS AND CONTROLS
The "transmitter related" combined indicators and controls are the following:

IMAPPD/Rev.5
• COU and CLR transmitters ON/OFF status: Shows which transmitters are currently
turned on. When the equipment is in MANUAL (and the user has access level 2 or
higher), these lamps can be clicked to turn the transmitters on or off.
• TX TO AIR status: Shows the position of the coax relay.
Main select: Shows the transmitter that is selected to be the main transmitter.
• NORMAL: Indicates that there are no alarms present among the monitor parameters
in the ILS. This indicator will always be the opposite of the ALARM indicator.
• ON/OFF button: Clicking this will turn the transmitters on/off.
• CHANGEOVER button: Clicking this performs a changeover between TX1 and TX2.
• MAIN select button: Clicking this toggles between selecting TX1 and TX2 as the main
transmitter.
• MANUAL/AUTO switch: When the manual/auto switch on the ILS cabinet is in the
AUTO position, this switch can be clicked to set the equipment in manual mode.
• INTERLOCK switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the interlock
switch on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM.
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the
local/remote switch on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM.
• WRITE PROTECT switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the write
protect switch on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM.
D.3.3.3 OTHER INDICATORS
The following text labels can also appear in this window:

• "INTERLOCK-DESELECTED": Indicates that the ILS is currently turned off with the
interlock switch.
• "REMOTE ACCESS GRANTED": Indicates that the Remote RMM Grant/Deny switch on
the Remote Control is in the grant position.
• "RMS ACCESS ACTIVE": Indicates that the RMS is operating at access level 2 or
higher. This may be caused by a user logged on to a serial port at access level 2 or
higher or with the use of the LCD menu at access level 2 or higher.
D.3.4 EVENT LIST
Selecting ILS-Data|Event list will bring up the window shown below. This window
displays events that have been downloaded from the ILS. This includes log-in/out,
configuration operations, alarms- and warning notifications.
The displayed fields are:

IMAPPD/Rev.5
• The date and time when the event occurred

• The user who caused the event, or System or Remote.
• The event description
The event list is downloaded and stored in the database each time a user logs on the
ILS. The RMM software will place the event "Possible loss of events" in the event list if it
is detected that there is no time overlap between already downloaded events and the
events available from the ILS.
D.3.5 MEASUREMENT STATUS DESCRIPTION
All measurements retrieved from the ILS are tagged with a status code. These codes are
displayed by using special characters and colours, according to the table below.
Code Colour Description
N/A (or # in The measurement is not applicable for the current
Cont. log equipment type or current equipment state (for example
files) some maintenance measurements are not applicable when
the transmitters are turned off).
Normal. No code or special character displayed.
w (lower Yellow Raw warning. The measurement is currently outside the
case) defined warning limits.
W (upper Yellow Delayed warning. Same as raw warning but the
case) measurement has been in this state for longer than the
configured delay for the parameter group.
a (lower Red Raw alarm. The measurement is currently outside the
case) defined alarm limits.
A (upper Red Delayed alarm. Same as raw alarm but the measurement
case) has been in this state for longer than the configured delay
for the parameter group.
****** The RMS subsystem in the ILS is unable to provide the data.
This can be caused by a faulty MO1212 board or an IIC-bus
error in the ILS.
????? The RMM software has no connection to the ILS or the data
is not stored in the database or log file. This will also be
displayed before the RMM software gets an updated monitor
or maintenance data set from the ILS.
D.4 CONFIGURING THE ILS

D.4.1 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD
The RMM software can save ILS configuration data to a file on the user's hard disk and
reconfigure the ILS with the saved configuration data when required.
The Configuration download and upload window are opened by selecting the File |
Configuration download and upload menu item. The window is shown below.
Access level 3 is required for using the Upload function. Download can be done at all
access levels.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
When the Download or Upload buttons are clicked, first a file selection window will be
shown. The user must select a filename for downloading or uploading configuration data
to/from.
If Upload was clicked the user must also select which boards in the ILS configuration
data should be uploaded for. This is done in the Configuration upload window shown
below. When the OK button is clicked the upload process starts. Uploading may take
several minutes.
D.4.2 MONITOR SETTINGS
D.4.2.1 MONITOR LIMITS
The Monitor tab in the Monitor settings windows shows the alarm and warning limits for
the monitor parameters. The list also shows the nominal value for each parameter. The
displayed limit values are relative to the nominal value. There are 32 parameters on
each monitor board. Depending on the monitor board and equipment type (e.g. one/two
frequency, cold/hot standby, etc) some of the parameters will be disabled (i.e. have
limits set to OFF) and not shown in the list. The user can select to display all parameters
by enabling the "Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type"
Preferences option. This option has been turned on to produce the image of the Monitor
settings window below. This sample is from an ILS without a standby monitor; standby
parameter limits are therefore not shown.
If the limits for a parameter on monitor 1, 2 and for the standby monitor (for hot
standby equipment) are equal, the limits for the parameter will be shown on a single
line in the list.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
Note: The values shown this window are arbitrary sample values. Refer to Appendix B in
the Operating Manual for the factory default monitor limits.
D.4.2.1.1 CHANGING MONITOR LIMITS
In order to change monitor limits the user must be logged on at access level 3 or as
master. In these access levels the user can click the Edit button to open the Monitor
limits edit window, which is shown below.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The title of the window shows the name of the parameter selected for editing. The
window has fields for editing the low and high alarm and warning limits and the nominal
value. The nominal value can be changed only for DDM parameters. The unit (if the
parameter has a defined measurement unit) for the limits is also shown.
The Symmetric limits button is used for enabling/disabling symmetric input mode. In
symmetric input mode the user only enters the high limits, the low limits will be
automatically set so that the limits are symmetric about the nominal value. Symmetric
input mode will be enabled by default if the currently configured limits are symmetric
when the window is opened.
The Set limits off is used for setting all limits to OFF. This fills in the special values -
9999 and 9999 in the low and high limit fields, which is the same as disabling alarm and
warning generation on the parameter. -9999 or 9999 can also be entered by the user to
disable a specific limit.
Note: For parameters where the warning limits are entered as a percentage of the alarm
limits and the alarm limit is set to 9999, it is not meaningful to use a warning limit other
than 9999.
The Apply to ... drop down list is used for selecting which monitor to update with the
new values.
Note: If the nominal value has been changed the new values must be applied to both
monitor 1 and 2 or to the standby monitor. The new values cannot be applied to e.g.
monitor 1 and not to monitor 2. This is because monitor 1 and 2 shares the same copy
of the nominal values.
Clicking the OK or the Apply button will send the new values to the ILS. The OK button
will in addition close the Monitor limit edit window.
Cancel will close window without sending anything to the ILS.
D.4.2.2 M AINTENANCE LIMITS
The Maintenance tab in the Monitor settings window shows the warning limits for the
maintenance parameters. The parameters are organized in a tree view. The board
names are at the top level. Double click a board name to see the parameters on the
board.
The figure below shows the Maintenance tab with the RMS board "expanded". The
complete list and description of all maintenance parameters can be found in appendix B
in the Operating Manual.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The Limit(s) column shows the configuration of the warning limits of each parameter.
The format of the displayed limits is depending on the parameter type. For analog
measurements the limits are shown as: LL/UL. Where LL is the lower limit and UL is the
high limit. A maintenance warning is generated when the measurement falls outside this
interval.
Digital measurements will normally be shown as the text: "Default". This means that the
limits are configured with the default limits. If the limits are not at the default setting,
the field can show any of the following texts:
• "Normally low" The limit has been changed from the default, which is that the
measurement is a logical high level, to a logical low level.
• "Normally high" The limit has been changed from the default, which is that the
measurement is a logical low level, to a logical high level.
• "OFF" The limit has been set off, i.e. the measurement will not produce a warning.
• "Invalid" The limits for the parameter has been set to illegal values.
• "Fixed" The limits is fixed internally in the ILS.
The Edit button is used for changing the limits. Clicking the Edit button will bring up one
of the Maintenance limit Edit window shown below. Access level 3 is required to edit
maintenance limits.
Note: In order to edit digital (non-user) maintenance parameters, the "Display all
monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type" Preferences option must be
enabled. This option must be enabled first because the user should not normally change
these limits.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.2.2.1 EDITING NON-USER MAINTENANCE PARAMETER LIMITS
The figure below shows the window used for entering new maintenance limits. The
window has fields for the low limit, the high limit, and the defined unit for the
parameter.
D.4.2.2.2 EDITING ANALOG USER PARAMETER LIMITS
The figure below shows the window used for entering name, scale, offset and limit
settings for analog user parameters.
D.4.2.2.3 EDITING DIGITAL USER PARAMETER LIMITS
The figure below shows the window used for entering name, signal direction and limit
settings for digital user parameters.
Note that the limits of Digital user parameters 1 and 2 (which are counters) cannot be
edited.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.2.3 DELAYS
The Delays tab in the Monitor settings window shows the configured delays for the
executive monitors and for the maintenance parameters. The delay values are in
seconds.
The Edit buttons can be clicked to open a window, as shown below, for editing the
selected delay. Editing delays requires access level 3.
Valid input range in this window is 0.4 to 102.3 seconds for executive monitors and 0 to
1023 for maintenance delays. The total changeover-shutdown delay will be two times
the executive monitor delay value. See Appendix B in the Operating Manual for the
default values.
The Apply to ... drop down list is used for selecting which monitor to update with the
new values. This field is not shown for maintenance delays.
D.4.2.4 POWER SCALING (NORMARC 7000A ONLY)
The scaling values in this window should only be changed on racks with the
first version of the PA module (LPA1230A/GPA1231A/GPA1232A version 1).
On newer PA modules, the power reading is pre-adjusted, and the scaling value
should be set to 1.0.
The values in this window can be used to adjust the power measurements done on the
transmitters. (The measured values are displayed in the maintenance measurement
window).

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The scaling values will normally be in the range 0.5-2.0.

These scaling values are stored in the RMS system in the ILS and not on the
transmitters. This means that the values will have to be changed if a PA module is
replaced, and restored if the RMS board is replaced.
D.4.2.5 INTEGRITY TEST (NORMARC 7000B ONLY)
The Integrity test tab in the Monitor settings window shows the configured delay for the
"Monitor alarm verification delay". The RMS verifies that the transmitter control has
detected alarm from the monitors after this delay after an operator turns off the
transmitters.
D.4.3 TRANSMITTER SETTINGS (NORMARC 7000A)
D.4.3.1 MODULATION SETTINGS
The Modulation tab in the Transmitter settings window is shown below.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
In this window the LF generator 90 Hz and 150 Hz signals may be switched on or off and
the Morse code settings may be changed (LLZ only).
The following table describes the effect of each Morse code setting.
Setting Transmitted ident.
Off None (silent)
Normal The configured morse code (see the Adjustments tab)
Cont. Continuous 1020 Hz tone
TST The Morse code for TST
The CLR quadrature mod. setting controls whether the Clearance LF signal is quadrature
modulated.
The Signal modulation and Morse code requires access level 2, while the CLR quadrature
modulation option requires access level 3 to change the setting.
D.4.3.2 TRANSMITTER ADJUSTMENTS
The following TX parameters can be changed for Course and Clearance (for two
frequency systems) for transmitter 1 and 2:
• 90Hz & 150Hz modulation balance (DDM)
• 90Hz & 150Hz modulation sum (SDM)
• RF power
• Ident modulation depth
• Runway Morse code identification (up to 4 letters)

IMAPPD/Rev.5
To change TX adjustment values click the Edit button in this window. Access level 3 is
required. A dialog similar to the one below will be opened.
This window shows the configured adjustment values for TX1 and TX2. The label above
each input field also indicates whether the transmitter is "on air" or not.
To change the parameter values the user has the following options:
• Click on the up and down arrows to increment/decrement the value.
• Press the up and down arrows on your keyboard to increment/decrement the value.
Enter a new value in the numeric input field.
The ILS will be updated with new value(s) when the Enter key is pressed or the OK or
Apply buttons is clicked.
The TX-adjustment values are the positions of digital potentiometers used and stored in
the EEPROM on the LF generator boards. The values are unit-less integers in the range
0-4095. Refer to the Operating Manual for a list of typical values used.
D.4.3.3 DME INTERFACE
The fields on this tab specifies the operation of the DME interface (LLZ only). Access
level 3 is required to change any of these settings.
The following tables describe each selection.
Keying master selections:
LLZ LLZ is the keying master
DME DME is the keying master

IMAPPD/Rev.5
DME active selections:

Open Open circuit indicates active DME (enables colocation)
Closed Closed circuit indicates active DME (enables
colocation)
D.4.4 TRANSMITTER SETTINGS (NORMARC 7000B)
D.4.4.1 MODULATION TAB (NORMARC 7000B)
The Modulation tab has controls for turning the 90 and 150 Hz signals on/off, selecting
the Morse code type, and whether the Voice shall be transmitted or muted.
The settings are read only at access level 1 and read/write at higher access levels.
Default settings will be restored when the user logs out.
Note 1: The "Morse signal" fields are visible only on LLZ equipment.
Note 2: The "Voice signal" fields are visible only when the "Voice generator installed"
system option is enabled.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.4.2 SIGNAL ADJUSTMENTS TAB (NORMARC 7000B)
The Signal adjustments tab displays a list of the current LF generator adjustments.
These values are stored in an EEPROM on each LF generator board.
The settings are read only at access level 1 and 2 and read/write at higher access levels.
Allowable range and typical values for each adjustment value are shown in the Edit
dialog for each parameter. Some parameters do not have a specific typical range.
The following signal adjustment parameters are available:

Parameter Unit Description Range Typical values
COU RF level dBV Sets COU CSB power LLZ:-100 to 15 LLZ: 10 to 15
level GP:-100 to 15 GP: 10 to 15
COU DDM Sets DDM on COU LLZ: -40 to 40 LLZ: -1 to 1
GP: -80 to 80 GP: -1 to 1
COU SDM Sets SDM on COU LLZ: 15 to 50 LLZ: 38 to 42
GP: 30 to 90 GP: 76 to 84
COU IDENT % Sets ident modulation LLZ: 0 to 18 LLZ: 5 to 15
level depth. GP: 0 GP: 0
COU VOICE % Sets voice level. LLZ: 0 to 100 0 (normally not
level GP: 0 used, use
requires other
installed
options)
COU SBO level dB Sets SBO level relative LLZ: -10 to 3 Depending on
to CSB level. GP: -10 to 0 antenna system
and runway
length.

IMAPPD/Rev.5

COU SBO phase º Sets SBO phase relative -180 to 180 LLZ: -10 to 10
to CSB phase. GP: -30 to 30
(when phase
offset is
correctly
adjusted)
COU SBO phase º When COU SBO phase is -180 to 180 No typical
offset set to zero, this value is values
used for setting the SBO
phase equal to the CSB
phase at the output of
the cabinet.
Only visible in factory
mode.
COU 90 Hz º Sets COU 90 Hz phase -1 to 1 -1 to 1
phase relative to 150 Hz.
mode.
COU/CLR LF º Sets 30 Hz phase LLZ: 0 to 40 No typical
phase between COU and CLR GP: 0 to 0 values
LF signals.
CLR RF level dBV Sets CLR CSB power LLZ:-100 to 15 No typical
level. GP:-100 to 15 values
CLR DDM level Sets DDM on CLR. LLZ: -40 to 40 LLZ: -1 to 1
GP: 40 to 95 GP: 55 to 60
CLR SDM level Sets SDM on CLR. LLZ: 15 to 50 LLZ: 38 to 42
GP: 30 to 95 GP: 76 to 84
CLR IDENT % Sets ident modulation LLZ: 0 to 18 LLZ: 5 to 15
level depth. GP: 0 GP: 0
CLR VOICE % Sets voice level. LLZ: 0 to 100 0 (normally not
level GP: 0 used, use
requires other
installed
options)
CLR SBO level dB Sets SBO level relative LLZ: -10 to 3 No typical
to CSB level. GP: N/A range
CLR SBO phase º Sets SBO phase relative LLZ: -180 to No typical
to CSB phase. 180 range
GP: N/A
CLR SBO phase º When CLR SBO phase is LLZ: -180 to No typical
offset set to zero, this value is 180 range
used for setting the SBO GP: N/A
phase equal to the CSB
phase at the output of
the cabinet.
mode.

IMAPPD/Rev.5

CLR 90 Hz º Sets COU 90 Hz phase LLZ: -1 to 1 LLZ: -1 to 1
phase relative to 150 Hz. GP: N/A GP: N/A
mode.
Morse code Sets the Morse code to
be transmitted as
identification. This is a 0
to 4-character string (A-
Z and space are
allowed).
By enabling factory mode in the Preferences window, the following test signal
parameters will also be displayed. The recommended way of changing these values is to
use the Flight check window.

COU DDM test This value is added to LLZ: -1.5 to 1.5 No typical
value 1 the COU DDM value GP: -4.5 to 4.5 values
when CL test signal 1 is
activated in the Flight
check window.
COU DDM test This value is added to Same as COU No typical
value 2 the COU DDM value DDM test value values
when CL test signal 2 is 1
check window.
COU SDM test Currently not in use.
value 1 Should be zero.
COU SDM test Currently not in use.
value 2 Should be zero.
COU SBO level dB This value is added to LLZ: 0 to 4 dB No typical
test value 1 the COU SBO level when GP: 0 to 4 dB values
DS test is set to Narrow
in the Flight check
window.
COU SBO level dB This value is added to LLZ: -4 dB to 0
test value 2 the COU SBO level when GP: -4 dB to 0
DS test is set to Wide in
the Flight check window.

IMAPPD/Rev.5

COU SBO phase º This value is added to LLZ: -95° to - LLZ: -90°
test value 1 the COU SBO phase 85° GP: -90°
when the 90° stub is GP: -125° to -
activated in the Flight 85°
check window. The value
should be -90.
This value can be
changed only by
enabling factory mode
and changing it in this
window.
Note that, since the
signal generation is
digital, it should not be
necessary to adjust this
value. If a 90° phase
shift is not observed
when the 90° stub is
activated, check
gain/offset adjustment
values in the SBO PA.
COU SBO phase º Currently not in use.
test value 2 Should be zero.
COU RF test dB This value is added to LLZ: -6 to 0 LLZ: -1 dB
value the COU RF level when GP: -6 to 0 GP: -1 dB
Test RF attenuation is
check window.
CLR SBO level dB Currently not in use.
CLR SBO level dB This value is added to LLZ: -5 to 0
test value 2 the CLR SBO level when GP: N/A
CLR test is set to Wide
in the Flight check
window.
CLR SBO phase º This is the same as COU LLZ: -95° to - LLZ: -90°
test value 1 SBO phase test value 1, 85° GP: -90°
but used for CLR SBO GP: -125° to -
instead. 85°
CLR SBO phase º Currently not in use.
CLR RF test dB This value is added to LLZ: -6 to 0 LLZ: -1 dB
value the CLR RF level when GP: -6 to 0 GP: -1 dB
Test RF attenuation is
check window.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.4.3 DME INTERFACE TAB (NORMARC 7000B)
The DME interface tab provides options for the DME interface.
The settings are read only at access level 1 and 2 and read/write at higher access
levels.
• "Keying master": The options are "LLZ" and "DME"
• "DME active signal": The options are "Open" and "Closed"
• "Ident type": The options are "Code" and "Pulse"
D.4.4.4 VOICE TAB (NORMARC 7000B)
The Voice tab provides voice configuration settings.

The settings are read only at access level 1 and 2 and read/write at higher access
levels.
• "Enable voice slot" option: Voice will be transmitted in two of 8 ident slots when
checked.
• "Gate voice signal" option: Voice will be muted in Morse code slots when checked.
Note 1: The "Voice" tab is only visible when the "Voice generator installed" system
option is enabled.
Note 2: Voice will only be sent if the keying master is set to "LLZ".

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.4.5 PA ADJUSTMENTS TAB (NORMARC 7000B)
The PA adjustments tab provides options for adjusting/calibrating offsets, loop phase,
power and temperature measurements in the power amplifier assemblies. In factory
mode, an additional tab, gain is displayed. Gain should only be adjusted by specially
trained personnel.
The settings are read only at access level 1 and 2 and read/write at higher access levels.
The transmitter to work with must be selected in the transmitter drop-down list.
The range of the potentiometer values is from 0 to 255.
D.4.4.5.1 OFFSET TAB
The "Offset" tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls offsets in the
PA-assembly.
When "Enable test mode" is checked a test mode is activated on the LF generator and in
the PA- assembly that result in the following signals being fed to either the I-input or Q-
input on the amplifier:
• CSB: 150 Hz sinus with 1.0 V amplitude. No DC offset.
• SBO: SBO signal with 1.5 V amplitude on each tone.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The text "Q off" or "I off" in blue colour denotes that either the Q or I input signals is
disabled by test modes in PA-assembly.
D.4.4.5.2 LOOP PHASE TAB
The "Loop phase" tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls the I and
Q loop delays in the PA. When "Enable test mode" is checked a test mode is activated
on the LF generator that result in the following signals begin fed to the inputs on the
amplifier:
• CSB: 3.5 V DC (no modulation signals)
• SBO: 1.5 V DC (no modulation signals) on the I and Q outputs.
A test mode that makes the PA operate in open loop mode is activated on the selected
PA (the text "Open loop" in blue colour denotes that this mode on the PA is active).
The "Demodulator meas." frame shows the I and Q demodulator measurements
converted to polar representation. The actual I and Q voltage measurements can be
displayed as pop-up text by resting the mouse pointer over the value or angle fields.
D.4.4.5.3 POWER TAB
The "Power" tab is used for calibrating the forward power measurements. The reverse
power measurements cannot be calibrated.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
There is no test mode for adjusting these potentiometers, so the "Enable test mode"
and the "I-signal" and "Q-signal" radio buttons are always disabled.
D.4.4.5.4 OVERTEMP. TAB
The "Overtemp" tab is used for adjusting the temperature levels of the automatic
shutdown function in the PA-assemblies.
The "Overtemp. turnoff limit" sets the temperature level in degrees Celsius at which the
RF output from the PA will be turned off. The "Overtemp. reset limit" sets the
temperature at which the RF output will be enabled again after the turnoff limit has
been exceeded (this allows the hysteresis to be configured).
Recommended turnoff limit is 85 degrees Celsius. Recommended reset limit is 75
degrees Celsius.
D.4.4.5.5 GAIN TAB (REQUIRES FACTORY-MODE)
Note: Changing the Gain adjustments requires special measurement equipment, and must
only be done at the factory or by specially trained personnel.
The "Gain" tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls gain in the I and
Q signals path in the demodulator in PA.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
When "Enable test mode" is checked a test mode is activated on the LF generator and in
the PA- assembly that result in the following signals being fed to either the I-input or Q-
input on the amplifier:
• CSB: 3.5 V DC (no modulation signals)
• SBO: 2 V DC (no modulation signals) on either the SBO I or SBO Q outputs.
The text "Q off" or "I off" in blue colour denotes that either the Q or I input signals is
disabled by test modes in PA-assembly.
D.4.5 TEST DDM (NORMARC 7000A)
The ILS-Settings | Test DDM function is for use when a DDM flight test is performed on
the system. The Test DDM window is shown in the figure below.
The window has the following fields and controls:

• Graphical readout of the current CL DDM and NF DDM measurement, and the low
and high alarm limits.
• Buttons for quick access to the monitor alarm/warning configuration dialog (only
when enabled in the Preferences window). Clicking one of these buttons will open
the Monitor limits edit window, which will have the currently measured DDM value
suggested as new alarm limit.
• Controls for activating the test signals.
• DDM adjustment "sliders" for adjusting dominance levels.
• Read only field that shows the position of the "sliders" relative to the CL
modulation balance value (see Transmitter adjustments and settings)
The required access levels for the fields in this dialog is as follows:
• To change monitor limits requires access level 3.
• All other settings require access level 2.
The test DDM values are unit-less integers in the range 0-4095.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.6 FLIGHT CHECK (NORMARC 7000B)
The Flight check window provides test modes and settings used during flight checks.
The test modes are read only at access level 1; can be activated at level 2 and the test
mode values can be changed at higher access levels.
The upper half of the window displays the CL, DS and NF monitor measurements
relative to the configured alarm limits. There are "Set limits" buttons for setting the
limits equal to the current monitor measurement.
The lower half of the window has tabs for selecting the transmitter and whether to work
with "Alignment" or "Alarm limit check" functions. See the screen dumps below.
All test signals will be reset if the window is closed or communication between computer
and ILS is lost.
D.4.6.1 ALIGNMENT TAB
The Alignment tab provides the following functions:

• A button for turning off the SBO signal (normally used during Modulation Level and
Modulation Equality flight checks). The text label left of the button will indicate
whether the SBO is on or off. Adjustment fields for modulation balance (DDM) and
modulation sum (SDM) are found to the right in the window. These adjustments will
normally be carried out to comply with flight measurement feedback.
• A button for inserting a 90° stub into the SBO RF signal paths (calibration of these
90° stubs is done from the Transmitter settings - Signal adj. when RMM program is in
Factory Mode) is found in the middle (normally used for overall phasing). The SBO
phase adjustment to the right is then used for calibrating the phase for the system.
Text above the button indicates whether the 90° stub is inserted or not.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
• For setting of course-sector/sector-width an SBO adjustment for setting the SBO level
versus the CSB level is provided. If reported course sector width is too wide: Increase
SBO level by corresponding value. If reported course sector width is too narrow:
Decrease SBO level by corresponding value.
D.4.6.2 ALARM LIMIT CHECK TAB
For setting and testing of alarm limits special controls are provided. One or more of the
different test signals can be applied simultaneously. The test signal types are described
below.
D.4.6.2.1 CL TEST SIGNALS
Two test signals can be preset/adjusted. One will normally be offset to provide an
alignment alarm on 90 Hz side (GP: low angle) while the other will be offset to
alignment alarm 150 Hz side (GP: high angle). Fine-tuning of the presets can be done
by pulling the sliders, clicking on the arrows at each end of the sliders or clicking the
up/down arrow to the side of the value fields.
The visual indication in the upper half of the Flight check window will indicate the
change in CL and NF DDM readings and will also indicate how close to the alarm limits
the signals are (alarm limit is indicated by a red line in the graphical readout for each
parameter).
If the alarm limit shows not to be correct when the alarm point is found, a new alarm
limit for the monitors can be set by clicking on the Set limits button between the Mon1
and Mon2 indication for the relevant parameter.
The monitored value for that parameter will then be suggested as a new alarm limit but
can of course be manually overwritten.
The "Set limits" button will only be shown if the option "Enable alarm limit setting in
level 3 from Flight check window" under the menu option File - Preferences is activated.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.6.2.2 DS TEST SIGNALS
For testing Narrow / Wide alarm limits, two settings can be preset/adjusted. Select
either Narrow or Wide test signals and adjust the SBO level until the correct alarm point
is found.
The visual indication in the upper half of the Flight check window will indicate the
change in DS DDM reading and will also indicate how close to the alarm limits the signal
is (alarm limit is indicated by a red line in the graphical readout for each parameter).
If the alarm limit shows not to be correct when the alarm point is found, a new alarm
limit for the monitors can be set by clicking on the Set limits button between the Mon1
and Mon2 indication for the relevant parameter.
The monitored value for that parameter will then be suggested as a new alarm limit, but
this value can be manually overridden.
The "Set limits" button will only be shown if the option "Enable alarm limit setting in
level 3 from Flight check window" under the menu option File | Preferences is activated.
D.4.6.2.3 CLR TEST SIGNALS
For testing of CLR wide alarm a test setting is provided. By activating this, the CLR SBO
will be reduced. Fine-tuning of the setting can be done by clicking the up/down arrows
to the side of the value field.
Changes in the CLR DDM value can be observed in the ILS-Data | Monitor window.
If the alarm limit has to be corrected this can be done via the ILS-Settings | Monitoring
window.
D.4.6.2.4 RF POWER ALARM
For testing of the RF power alarm, test settings for both Course and CLR power have
been implemented.
By activating the test, the output level of the selected transmitter will be reduced with
the level selected.
Changes in the RF value can be observed in the ILS-Data | Monitor window.
If the alarm limit has to be corrected this can be done via the ILS-Settings | Monitoring
window.
D.4.7 GENERAL SETTINGS
D.4.7.1 ABOUT GENERAL SETTINGS
The "General settings" window is used for configuring the operation of the RMS
subsystem (board RMA1215) in the ILS. These settings do not affect the executive
monitoring of the ILS signals or the transmitted ILS signals.
D.4.7.2 ILS DATE AND TIME
The Date/time tab in the General settings window is used for displaying and setting the
current date and time of the real time clock on the RMS board in the ILS. Master access
level is required to set the date and/or time.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.7.3 USER ADMINISTRATION
The User adm tab in the General settings window is used for administration of the users
and passwords.
When logged in as a master user this window allows configuring of existing and new
users, which shall be granted access to the RMM system. When logged in as an ordinary
user, this window only displays the last time each user was logged on.
The LCD MENU and MASTER users are always set up, and cannot be deleted. The LCD
MENU entry is used for setting the four-letter password required for entering access
level 3 from the LCD menu on RMA1215.
Notes:
• Passwords must be 6-8 characters in length (the LCD MENU must be 4 characters).
Both the username and passwords can only consist of characters in the ranges A-Z,
a-z or 0-9.
• The usernames for LCD MENU and MASTER cannot be changed.
• For the LCD MENU user only an access level 3 password is entered.
• For the MASTER user, no password field can be empty.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.7.4 LAMP MAPPINGS
At access level 3 the user may configure which of the small warning LED's that are
"mapped" to the main (big) warning LED on the remote control panel (and slave panel)
and on the local panel.
An "X"-mark to the left of the warning type indicates that an active warning of that type
will cause the main warning lamp to be activated.
If the configuration is changed, the Apply button must be clicked to send the new
settings to the ILS.
D.4.7.5 MEDIUM STORAGE SAMPLE INTERVAL
The sample intervals for the medium time storage in the ILS may be selected on the
Medium storage tab in the General settings window.
Access level 3 is required for changing the sample interval.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The following intervals way be selected:

Storage interval Total medium storage time
15 Minutes 24 Hours
30 Minutes 48 Hours
60 Minutes 4 Days
120 Minutes 8 Days
If the configuration is changed, the Apply button must be clicked to send the new
settings to the ILS.
D.4.7.6 PORT SETUP
When the user selects "Port setup" in the General settings window the tab shown below
is displayed.
The window displays the currently configured bit rates and init strings. Pressing the Edit
button brings up a dialog where you can change the bit rate and/or the init string for the
selected port. Note that it is no init string for the local port, since a modem is not
supported for this port.
Pressing the Init modem makes the ILS send the modem initiation at the selected port.
If the init-string is left blank or the word "default" is written, the ILS will use a default
init-string that shall work on standard Hayes compatible modems under normal
conditions.
Please consult the modem manual for further information about modem commands and
initialisation.
D.4.7.7 CABINET NAME
When the user selects "Cabinet name" in the General settings window the tab shown
below is displayed.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
The cabinet is displayed in the first row of the LCD panel. It is also used in the RMM
system for identifying the ILS. The cabinet name can only be configured in ILS cabinets
with RMS software version 13 or later.
The Master access level is required for changing the cabinet name.
D.4.7.8 SYSTEM OPTIONS
When the user selects "System options" in the General settings window the tab shown
below is displayed.
The user must be logged on as Master to make any changes to these settings.
Note: If any of these options are changed the RMS must be restarted (power
the cabinet off and on).
The following sections describe each option.
D.4.7.8.1 VOICE GENERATOR INSTALLED
This option is to be enabled when the ILS is equipped with the voice module on the LF
generator boards (NORMARC 7000A) or an external voice generator (NORMARC 7000B).
It is used for enabling voice measurements and options in the RMS and RMM software.
D.4.7.8.2 UA DDM UNIT ON LCD PANEL
When enabled, selects µA instead of %DDM as the DDM measurement unit on the LCD.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.4.7.8.3 FORCED IDENT TURN-OFF IN MANUAL MODE
When enabled, the RMS will automatically turn off the ident (and voice, if present) when
the system enters "manual" mode. The ident will also be turned off about 1 second after
start up if the system is in manual mode when powered on. Also, the ident warning LED
will not be activated while in manual mode. The ident will also be turned on when the
system enters "auto" mode.
Note: The RMS automatically sets the ident mode back to "Normal" when logging out
from access level 2 or higher. On equipment with LF 1223 boards (used in NORMARC
7000A), the NMP110B.02 FPGA is required for setting Normal ident if the RMS looses its
access as a result of Grant/Deny switch change or Local/Remote switch change.
D.4.7.8.4 SINGLE TRANSMITTER SYSTEM
This option is to be enabled in cabinets with one transmitter chain. When enabled the
RMS will ignore IIC read errors from TX2: OS,LF, and LPA/GPA COU/CLR, and sets the
measurements to N/A. (The warning limits are, ignored for any maintenance
measurement that is N/A, so there is no need to set the limits "off")
D.4.7.8.5 SINGLE MONITOR SYSTEM
This option is to be enabled in cabinets with one monitor. When enabled the RMS
ignores IIC read errors from monitor 2 and monitor 2 RF frontend and sets these
measurements to N/A. (The warning limits are, ignored for any maintenance
measurement that is N/A, so there is no need to set the limits "off"). Monitor disagree
warning (LED and event) is suppressed.
D.4.7.8.6 NEAR FIELD MONITOR NOT INSTALLED
This option is to be enabled when no NF monitor is installed on the ILS. It will hide all
the NF readings in the Monitor measurements window, hide all readings of Maintenance
parameters from monitor 1 MO and MF boards and remove the options for readout and
setting of NF alarm limits/warning limits/delay from the LCD menu.
Note: In addition to enabling this option the NF alarm/warning limits must manually be
set OFF from the RMM software in factory mode to inhibit generation of NF alarm and
warnings. Use the Preferences window to turn on factory mode.
D.4.7.8.7 SIGNAL INTEGRITY TEST FAILURE ON PARAM LED (NORMARC 7000B ONLY)
Enable this option to activate the Param LED if any of the integrity checks fails. When
enabled, any monitor parameter warnings will not activate this LED, instead any monitor
parameter warning will be indicated by the Maint LED. Refer to the handbooks for a
description of the integrity checks performed by the RMS.
D.4.7.8.8 M ANUAL MODE TURNS TRANSMITTERS OFF FOR 20 S (NORMARC 7000B ONLY)
Enable this option to make the RMS automatically turn the transmitters off when Manual
mode is activated. After 20 seconds the RMS will turn the transmitters on again.
D.4.7.8.9 TILT SENSOR INSTALLED
This option is to be enabled when the tilt sensor is installed. When enabled, the RMS
and RMM software will display the tilt sensor measurements and limits. Note: This
option should only be used on GP equipment. RMS version 13.3 or later is required to
use this feature.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.5 HISTORICAL DATA

D.5.1 ABOUT HISTORICAL DATA
D.5.1.1 HISTORICAL DATA STORAGE IN THE ILS
The ILS has battery backed RAM in the RMS subsystem (RMA1215) board that is used to
store historical data. Four different types of historical data is stored:
• Medium time periodic storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance
parameters stored periodically at user specified intervals (see Medium time periodic
settings). The storage contains the last 96 samples.
• Long time periodic storage: For every day through a 180 days period, the mean value
and standard deviation of all monitor and analog maintenance parameters are stored.
• Warning storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters at the
instant when a warning LED is activated. The 25 last warnings are stored.
• Alarm storage: Samples of all monitor and maintenance parameters for a period
starting from 30s before an alarm occurred and ending with the actual alarm sample.
The last seven alarms are stored in the ILS. Two alarms will be stored in the ILS for
each alarm condition that results in a transmitter changeover, which is followed by a
shutdown.
In addition the ILS stores an event list in the battery backed RAM. See Viewing events
for more information about the event list.
The historical data stored in the ILS can be cleared from the LCD menu on the front of
the ILS cabinet. (This should always be done just before a system is set operative).
D.5.1.2 HISTORICAL DATA STORAGE IN THE RMM SOFTWARE
The RMM software allows the user to download the historical data from the ILS. The
different storage types are saved in the following ways on the PC:
• Medium time and Long time periodic data: When downloaded, this data is stored in a
database on the user's hard disk. Storing the data in a database allows the user to
browse through data measured over a longer period than is stored inside the ILS. The
data can also imported into third party software (for example Microsoft Excel) with
the use of ODBC database access (option).
• Warning and Alarm storage: When downloaded, this data is stored as files on the
users hard disk. Storing the data as files simplifies the task of moving the data from
one computer to another, sending the data as e-mail, etc.
• Event storage: The event list is downloaded and stored in the database each time a
user logs on to an ILS.
The following sections describe how to download historical data and how to view the
data once it has been downloaded.
To delete historical data stored for a station in the database requires the user to delete
the station from the station list. There is no option to delete historical data only.
D.5.2 DOWNLOADING HISTORICAL DATA
Selecting the menu item File|Storage download opens the "Storage download"
window shown below. This window is used to select a historical storage and start
downloading it from the ILS.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
If there is no data in a historical storage it will not be possible selecting it for download.
As it can be stored historical data for up seven alarms in the ILS, the user must select
which alarms to download. The time stamps shown in the window are the time of the
last data set in each storage (this time will be the same as the time of the changeover
or shutdown of the transmitters plus a few tenths of a second).
When a warning or alarm storage data is selected for download, a window will be
opened in which the user can select a folder and filename for saving the data to. When
medium time or long time period storage data is selected the data will be stored in the
database.
D.5.3 HISTORICAL DATA
The menu item File | Open downloaded data is used to open and view downloaded
historical data. The window shown below is opened when this menu item is selected.
The user must select the type of historical storage to open and the station name (for
medium time and long time periodic data) or filename (for warning and alarm storage).
When the user clicks "Open" the historical data is opened. The main program window
will then change, and become similar to the window below.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
There are panels placed at the top and the bottom of the program window. The top
panel shows the station name and the station type along with a "Close" button to stop
viewing the historical data. The bottom panel contains browse controls for selecting the
currently displayed data set among the data available in the storage.
The following ILS-Data menu items can be used to view data from the selected
historical storage:
1. Monitor
2. Maintenance
3. Event list (only when viewing medium time periodic or long time periodic
historical data)
4. Diagnostics
When viewing alarm storage data, the bottom panel will also have a drop-down list for
selecting the alarm storage to be browsed. Also shown is a text field that shows the
result of the automatically performed diagnosing for the selected alarm storage.

IMAPPD/Rev.5
D.5.4 CONTINUOUS LOGGING
The RMM program can be used to save the monitor and maintenance measurements
that is currently being received from an ILS directly to a file. This function is referred to
as "Continuous logging".
Continuous logging should not be confused with historical data stored in the ILS. The
following points describe the major differences:
• Data is logged real-time, i.e. only as long as the user is logged on to the ILS.
• Monitor and maintenance measurements must be saved to separate files.
• The user has complete control of the interval between saved data sets (specifying a
data set interval = zero seconds causes all received data to be saved).
• Data that has been saved with Continuous logging cannot be viewed from within the
RMM program. A text editor (for example Windows Notepad) or other third party
software (for example Microsoft Excel) must be used for opening and viewing the
contents Continuous log files.
A typical utilization of the Continuous logging feature can be to find the cause of
problems that are not logged (or sufficiently logged) in the internal historical storages.
D.6 FAULT DIAGNOSTICS

D.6.1 ABOUT FAULT DIAGNOSTICS
The RMM software has two algorithms to isolate a failure in the ILS. The algorithms are
the Current data diagnostics and the Alarm diagnostics.
D.6.2 CURRENT DATA DIAGNOSTICS
Current data diagnostics is invoked by selecting the menu item ILS-Data|Diagnostics.

Based upon the currently displayed data, which can originate from a live ILS connection
or from historical data storage, the program will suggest the faulty module(s), if any.
Refer to chapter 5 in the Instruction Manual for a detailed description of the algorithm
used to isolate faults.
D.6.3 ALARM DIAGNOSTICS
This diagnostic function are automatically performed when an alarm storage is

downloaded from the ILS. The diagnose result is shown on the screen when historical
alarm data is viewed.
Note that the alarm diagnostics algorithm works on alarms that causes a changeover to
standby transmitter. If the changeover is followed by shutdown, this information is used
in the algorithm for diagnosing the changeover alarm. It does not diagnose shutdown
alarms as standalone alarms.
Refer to chapter 5 in the Instruction Manual for a detailed description of the algorithm
used to isolate faults.

IMAPPD/Rev.5

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instrument Landing System: Commercial - in - Confidence

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instrument Landing System: Commercial - in - Confidence

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Commercial - in - Confidence

Instrument Landing System

Park Air Systems AS Name Signature Date

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

Document part/Chapter Number Rev

© Copyright 2004 Park Air Systems AS

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

Chapter Description Remove pages Insert pages

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

- Page intentionally blank -

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

REQUESTS OR ERRATA TO PARK AIR SYSTEMS

Park Air Systems AS

Document title | NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

Reservation: Park Air Systems AS reserves the right to make

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

- Page intentionally blank -

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

1. SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................ 1-1

2. SECTION 2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 2-1

3. SECTION 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .................................................... 3-1

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

3.1.6 System Status Indications .......................................................................................... 3-5

4. SECTION 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 4-1

5. SECTION 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................. 5-1

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

6. SECTION 6 PARTS LIST .......................................................................... 6-1

7. SECTION 7 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SET-UP ......................................... 7-1

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

7.6 Monitor Alignment....................................................................................................... 7-40

8. SECTION 8 DETAILED TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................... 8-1

SECTION 11 APPENDIXES ........................................................................................ A-1

APPENDIX A.MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS .......................................... A-1

APPENDIX B.FAR FIELD MONITOR ............................................................................ B-1

APPENDIX C.POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................. C-1

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

APPENDIX D.WINDOWS RMM PROGRAM ................................................................. D-1

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation ..................................................................... 1-3

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

Figure 7-5 ILS main cabinet connection overview ................................................ 7-5

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

Table 4-1 Periodic Maintenance Checks............................................................. 4-1

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

RTC Real Time Clock

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7031B-7032B

FIRST AID IN CASE OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

EXPIRE AIR METHOD OF ARTIFICAL RESPIRATION

2. Make a brief inspection of the mouth and throat to ensure

3. Give the patient’s head the maximum backwards tilt, so

4. Open your mouth wide , make an airtight seal over the

5. After exhaling, turn your head to watch for chest move-

Send for medical assistance if possible.

NORMARC 7031B-7032B Instruction Manual

WARNING - HEALTH HAZARD

BERYLLIA - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Symptoms of poisoning, indicated by respiratory troubles or cyanosis (grey or blue discol-

They MUST NOT:

B: be heated excessively (normal soldering is quite safe).